IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide_ga32054325

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-25

��

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-25

��

Note:Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in “Notices” on page 293.

The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent withlocal law.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUTWARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (orregions) do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statementmay not apply to you.

Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005, 2011.US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contractwith IBM Corp.

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Safety notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiSafety notices and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Danger notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiLabels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xivCaution notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvAttention notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviUsage restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiRack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiSafety inspection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiRack relocation (19" rack). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Relocating the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiFire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiWho should read this document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiRelated documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiSupported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiWebsites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxivHow this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxivNotices and statements used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvGetting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvBefore you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvUsing the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviHardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviFirmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Terminology and conventions used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviActive/active and high-availability terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiStorage terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiCommand conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiiFormatting conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiiKeyboard conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Storage expansion unit support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Intermixing EXN units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Storage expansion unit cabling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Connecting a gateway to external storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Data ONTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Adapter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6High availability or active/active configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9N3300 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

N3300 A10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 iii

N3300 A20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10N3300 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

N3400 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13N3400 A11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13N3400 A21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14N3400 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

N3600 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16N3600 A10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16N3600 A20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17N3600 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

N3700 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 21Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22N3700 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

N5200 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24N5200 A10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24N5200 A20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26N5200 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

N5200 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28N5200 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28N5200 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30N5200 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30


N5300 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35N5300 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36N5300 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37N5300 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37


N5500 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42N5500 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43N5500 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44N5500 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44


N5600 gateway hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50N5600 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51N5600 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52N5600 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

N6040 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53N6040 Model A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54N6040 Model A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

iv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

N6040 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57N6060 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

N6060 Model A12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59N6060 Model A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Connecting storage expansion units to the N6060. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60N6060 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

N6070 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63N6070 Model A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64N6070 Model A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Connecting storage expansion units to the N6070. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65N6070 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

N6210 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68N6210 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70N6210 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72



N7700 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81N7700 A11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81N7700 A21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Connecting storage expansion units to the N7700 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85N7700 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

N7900 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86N7900 A11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86N7900 A21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Connecting storage expansion units to the N7900 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89N7900 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

N7950T hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91N7950T model E22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Connecting storage expansion units to the N7950T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93N7950T feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95EXN1000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96EXN2000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99EXN3000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100EXN3500 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100EXN4000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Rack mount requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Software packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Software bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108IBM N series controller software feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111IBM N series host software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Contents v

||||

||||

Chapter 4. Site planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125System connectivity requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Fibre Channel connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Ethernet connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Balancing the load across PDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Examples of balancing the load with a single component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Examples of balancing the load with two components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130ASCII terminal console wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Connecting to an ASCII terminal console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132How the measurements are made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Converting watts to volt-amps (VA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Important information about ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133N3700 hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146N5000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148N6000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152N6200 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157N7000 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161N7x50T series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164EXN1000 hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168EXN3000 hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171EXN3500 hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Important factors to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Rack considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Power supplies and power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176System input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Primary computer power service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Computer room emergency power-off controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Three-phase power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Thermal considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Floor-loading specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Floor plan considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Creating a floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 5. Cable planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Cable measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Cable labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Chapter 6. AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187How does AutoSupport work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Interaction with mail hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Short e-mail messages for urgent events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Technical Support response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

High-availability considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Recommended AC power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

vi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191FRU/CRU list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Power cord list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952101 Model N00 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952101 Model N42 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967014 Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Model T00 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Model T42 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . 213Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems . . . . 215Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006) . . . . . . . 217Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1018) . . . . . . . . . . . 219Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems. . . . . 223Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Contents vii

Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23016-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . 232Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . 232Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems . . . . . . 233Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23916 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . 241Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . 241Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242512-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems . . . . . . 245Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . 250Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . 250Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2518-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

viii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251512-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2521-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2522-Port 10-GbE NIC (FC 1078) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253SFP+ Optical mod. for 1078 (FC 2014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems . . . . . . . 255PCI-X Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) . . . . . . . . . . . 263Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26416-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . 266Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . 266Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266512-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems . . . . . . 269Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) . . . . . . . . . . . 272Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) . . . . . . . . . . . 2738-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2738-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273512-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2731-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ (FC 1078) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Quad-port 8 Gbps FC HBA (FC 1079) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA (FC 1080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Contents ix

||||

Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM . . . . . . . . . 277Installing or replacing a caching module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Installing or replacing a caching module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Running diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Running system-level diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279About this task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281About this task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Completing the replacement process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N7x50T series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N7000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N6200 series systems library (covering the N6210 and N6240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N6000 series systems library (covering the N6040, N6060 and N6070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N5000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286N3700 storage system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286N series storage expansion units library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Data ONTAP 7.3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Data ONTAP 7.2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Data ONTAP 7.1 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Gateway systems library (Data ONTAP 7.2 and later, including Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode). . . . . . . . . 290Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Other N series and N series-related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . 297Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . 297Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

x IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

||

Figures

1. Ground check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224. LC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266. 1000Base-SX NICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277. PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288. PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

10. PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12911. PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13012. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13013. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18014. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19915. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20016. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20217. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20318. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xi

xii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Safety notices

This section contains information about:v “Safety notices and labels”v “Laser safety” on page xviv “Rack safety” on page xviiv “Fire suppression systems ” on page xxi

For information about environmental notices, see the IBM® Environmental Noticesand User Guide, Z125-5823.

Safety notices and labelsWhen using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention noticescontained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent theseverity of the safety condition.

The following sections define each type of safety notice and provide examples.

The following notices and statements are used in IBM documents. They are listedbelow in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. Follow the links formore detailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attentionnotices in the sections that follow.v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.v “Attention notices” on page xv: These notices indicate potential damage to

programs, devices, or data.v “Caution notices” on page xv: These statements indicate situations that can be

potentially hazardous to you.v “Danger notices”: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially

lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly toproducts to warn of these situations.

v In addition to these notices, “Labels” on page xiv may be attached to theproduct to warn of potential hazards.

Danger noticesA danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremelyhazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice torepresent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could placehazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices thatattach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer toensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to preventan electrical shock.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xiii

A comprehensive danger notice provides instructions on how to avoid shockhazards when servicing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow theprocedures in the following danger notice.

DANGER

Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, andcommunication cables are hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during anelectrical storm.

v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and groundedelectrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper voltage and phaserotation according to the system rating plate.

v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product toproperly wired outlets.

v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnectsignal cables.

v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,water, or structural damage.

v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunicationssystems, networks, and modems before you open the devicecovers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation andconfiguration procedures.

v Connect and disconnect cables as described below wheninstalling, moving, or opening covers on this product or attacheddevices.

To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Remove power cords from the outlet.

3. Remove signal cables from connectors.

4. Remove all cables from devices.

To Connect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Attach all cables to devices.

3. Attach signal cables to connectors.

4. Attach power cords to outlet.

5. Turn device ON.

LabelsAs an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products orproduct components to warn of potential hazards.

The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels:

xiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

DANGER

Hazardous voltage, current, or energy levels are presentinside any component that has this label attached.

Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.

DANGER

Multiple power cords

To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.

Caution noticesA caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous topeople because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompaniedby different symbols, as in the examples below:

If the symbol is... It means...

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity thanelectrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by othersafety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in theproduct. Laser symbols are always accompanied by theclassification of the laser as defined by the U. S.Department of Health and Human Services (for example,Class I, Class II, and so forth).

Sample caution notices:

CAUTION:This product is equipped with a 3–wire (two conductors and ground)power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly groundedelectrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.

CAUTION:Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting onsystem links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an opticalfiber cable or open receptacle.

Attention noticesAn attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, device, orsystem, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attentionnotice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows:

Safety notices xv

Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.);you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for opticalcables because they can be easily overtightened, causing damage to thecable.

Laser safetyWhen using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage systemmust be installed in a restricted access location.

CAUTION:This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with opticalinstruments. (C028)

This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiationPerformance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safetystandard IEC 825-2.

CAUTION:Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting onsystem links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 powerlevels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber cable oropen receptacle. (C027)

Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers thatcomply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IECstandard 825–1. Optical products that do not comply with these standards mayproduct light that is hazardous to the eyes.

Usage restrictionsThe optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector orwith a dust plug.

xvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Rack safety

Rack installation

DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanicalloading, always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of therack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devices startingfrom the bottom of the rack cabinets.

v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or workspace. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Besure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet beforeservicing any device in the rack cabinet.

v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devicesinstalled in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cordfrom a device installed in one rack cabinet into a power deviceinstalled in a different rack cabinet.

CAUTION:

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambienttemperatures will exceed the manufacturer's recommended ambienttemperature for all your rack-mounted devices.

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised.Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front, orback of a unit used for air flow through the unit.

v Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipmentto the supply circuit so that overloading of the circuits does notcompromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection.

v To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to therating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine thetotal power requirement of the supply circuit.

v This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved forservicing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to move thedrawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack tobecome unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.

Safety inspection procedurePerform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditionsoccur:v The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement.v Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.v An alterations-and-attachments review is performed.v Changes have been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operation

of the equipment.v External devices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack.

Safety notices xvii

Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not covered in the safety checks. Ifthe inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must becorrected before you can service the machine.

Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafecondition.

Do the following safety checks:1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor.2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached

to both the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack.CAUTION:The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottom rearof the rack to prevent the rack from turning over when the filers or storageexpansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out or install anyfiler or storage expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is not attached tothe rack.

3. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that exposethe internal parts of the rack.

4. Check the covers for a proper fit to the rack. The covers should be in placeand secure.

5. Open the back door of the rack.6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that is

installed in the rack.7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety

hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.8. Check the internal cables for damage.9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack.

10. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that itmatches the voltage at the outlet.

11. Check the external power cable for damage.12. Perform the following grounding checks:

a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external powercord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page xix.

xviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance betweenthe metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets oneach power distribution bus.

13. Check for the following conditions for each external device that has anattached power cord:v Damage to the power cord.v The correct grounded power cord.v With the external power cord connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or

less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug andthe metal frame of the device.

14. Close the rear cover of the rack.15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack.

Rear View

L1

L1

L1

RT000015

Figure 1. Ground check

Safety notices xix

Rack relocation (19" rack)

CAUTION:Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improvesrack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever yourelocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:

v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at thetop of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to theconfiguration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is notknown, you must do the following:

– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.

– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rackcabinet.

– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in therack cabinet below the 32U level.

– If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets,detach the rack cabinet from the suite.

– Inspect the route that you plan to take when moving the rack to eliminatepotential hazards.

– Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loadedrack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with your rack cabinetfor the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.

– Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.).

– Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.

– Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.

– Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinetduring movement.

– Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.

– Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:

- Lower the four leveling pads.

- Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

- If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rackcabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.

– If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to theconfiguration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet inthe original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower the levelingpads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to thepallet.

For additional information, see the documentation for your rack cabinet.

xx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Relocating the rackThe following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section.

CAUTION:Make sure that you do the following:

v Before you add or remove drawers, always have the leveling feet lowered andthe front and rear stabilizer installed, or have the rack bolted to the floor.

v Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first.

v Always remove drawers from the top of the rack first.

v Always install the heaviest drawers on the bottom of the rack.

v Remove two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocate it.

v Never push on the sides of the rack.

Attention: If the rack has equipment located above EIA location 32, you mustremove the equipment in position 32 and above from the rack before you move it.Always remove the equipment from the top of the rack first.

Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack:1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed.2. Disconnect all power cables.3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installed

before continuing this procedure.4. Before removing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs on

the controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that thebatteries are in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during therelocation process, remove and reseat the battery packs before removing thedrawer.

Complete the following steps to relocate the rack:1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remove the stabilizers.2. Raise all the leveling feet.3. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster.4. Move the rack to the new position.5. Reposition the rack.

For additional information, see the documentation for your rack cabinet.

Fire suppression systemsA fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer's owninsurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both,should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correctlevel of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment tointernal and external standards that require certain environments for reliableoperation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with firesuppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nordoes IBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.

Safety notices xxi

xxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

About this book

This document provides introductory and planning information for the followingIBM System Storage® N series products:v N3300, N3400, N3600 filersv N3700 filersv N5000 series filers and gateways (N5200, N5300, N5500, and N5600)v N6000 series filers and gateways (N6040, N6060, and N6070)v N6200 series filers and gateways (N6210, N6240, and N6270)v N7000 series filers and gateways (N7700 and N7900)v N7x50T series filers and gateways (N7950T)v EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, EXN3500, and EXN4000 storage expansion units

Note: This guide applies to systems, including systems with gateway functionality,running Data ONTAP 7.x and Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode. In the Data ONTAP8.x 7-Mode product name, the term 7-Mode signifies that the 8.x release hasthe same features and functionality found in Data ONTAP 7.3 release family.

Who should read this documentThis guide is for qualified system administrators and service personnel who arefamiliar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. Thisdocument is intended to provide information to customers, operators,administrators, installers, and service personnel.

Related documentsThe following documents, as well as documentation for Data ONTAP and othersoftware, are available on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed andnavigated as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

For information about installation and setup of your N series system, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that shipped with your system.

For information about replacing components in your N series system, see theHardware and Service Guide for with your system.

For information about error messages, troubleshooting, and monitoring the LEDsfor your N series system and optional adapter cards, see the IBM System Storage Nseries Platform Monitoring Guide.

For diagnostic information about your N series system, see the IBM System StorageN series Diagnostics Guide or the IBM System Storage N series System Level DiagnosticsGuide, as applicable for your hardware platform.

Supported featuresIBM System Storage N series storage systems are driven by NetApp Data ONTAPsoftware. Some features described in the product software documentation areneither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contact your local IBM representativeor reseller for further details.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xxiii

Information about supported features can also be found on the N series supportwebsite, which is accessed and navigated as described in “Websites.”

WebsitesIBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latesttechnical information and download device drivers and updates. The followingweb pages provide N series information:v A listing of currently available N series products and features can be found at

the following web page:www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

v The IBM System Storage N series support website requires users to register inorder to obtain access to N series support content on the web. To understandhow the N series support web content is organized and navigated, and to accessthe N series support website, refer to the following publicly accessible web page:www.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/This web page also provides links to AutoSupport information as well as otherimportant N series product resources.

v IBM System Storage N series products attach to a variety of servers andoperating systems. To determine the latest supported attachments, go to the IBMN series interoperability matrix at the following web page:www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

v For the latest N series hardware product documentation, including planning,installation and setup, and hardware monitoring, service and diagnostics, see theIBM N series Information Center at the following web page:http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/nasinfo/nseries/index.jsp

How this document is organizedThis document contains the following chapters:v Chapter 1, “Planning for the IBM N series storage system,” on page 1v Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9v Chapter 3, “IBM N series storage system software features,” on page 103v Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 125v Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 183v Chapter 6, “AutoSupport,” on page 187v Appendix A, “Recommended power line sizes,” on page 189v Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 191v Appendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 195v Appendix D, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 209v Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,”

on page 215v Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,”

on page 223v Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” on

page 233v Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” on

page 245v Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on

page 255

xxiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

http://www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/nasinfo/nseries/index.jsp

v Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,” on page277

v Appendix L, “IBM System Storage N series documentation,” on page 285

Notices and statements used in this documentThe caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in themultilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statementis numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safetydocument.

The following types of notices and statements are used in this document:v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you

avoid inconvenient or problem situations.v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data.

An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in whichdamage could occur.

v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardousto you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentiallyhazardous procedure step or situation.

v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal orextremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before thedescription of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step orsituation.

Getting information, help, and serviceIf you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more informationabout IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM toassist you. This section contains information about where to go for additionalinformation about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problemwith your IBM N series product, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.

Taiwan Contact InformationIBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:IBM Taiwan Corporation3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei TaiwanTel: 0800-016-888

Before you callBefore you call, make sure you have taken these steps to try to solve the problemyourself:v Check all cables to make sure they are connected.v Check the power switches to make sure the system is turned on.

About this book xxv

v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use thediagnostic tools that come with your system.

v Refer to the IBM support website for information on known problems andlimitations.

Using the documentationThe latest versions of N series software documentation, including Data ONTAPand other software products, are available on the IBM N series support website,which is accessed and navigated as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

Current N series hardware product documentation is shipped with your hardwareproduct in printed documents or as PDF files on a documentation CD. For thelatest N series hardware product documentation PDFs, go to the IBM N seriessupport website.

Hardware documentation, including planning, installation and setup, andhardware monitoring, service, and diagnostics, is also provided in an IBM N seriesInformation Center at the following web page:


Hardware service and supportYou can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services.Visit the following web page for support telephone numbers:

www.ibm.com/planetwide/

Firmware updatesIBM N series product firmware is embedded in Data ONTAP. As with all devices,it is recommended that you run the latest level of firmware. Any firmware updatesare posted to the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and navigatedas described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

Note: If you do not see new firmware updates on the IBM N series supportwebsite, you are running the latest level of firmware.

Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on your machine beforecontacting IBM for technical support.

Terminology and conventions used in this documentThis guide uses the following terminology, command conventions, formatconventions and keyboard conventions.

The term filer describes IBM N series storage systems that either contain internaldisk storage or attach to disk storage expansion units specifically designed for theIBM N series storage systems. Filer storage systems do not support usingthird-party disk storage systems. The following disk storage expansion units arespecifically designed for the IBM N series filers:v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN3500 SAS disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

xxvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


http://www.ibm.com/planetwide

v IBM EXN1000 Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storageexpansion unit

In this document, the term gateway describes IBM N series storage systems thathave been ordered with gateway functionality. Gateways support various types ofstorage, and they are used with third-party disk storage systems. In this case, diskstorage for customer data and the RAID controller functionality is provided by theback-end disk storage system. A gateway might also be used with disk storageexpansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series models.

The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer,either by itself or with additional disk drives.

Active/active and high-availability termsactive/active configuration

In the Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 release families, refers to a pair of storagesystems (sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other ifone of the two systems stops functioning. Also sometimes referred to asactive/active pairs.

clusterIn the Data ONTAP 7.1 release family, refers to a pair of storage systems(sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other if one ofthe two systems stops functioning. In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, a cluster isa group of connected nodes (storage systems) that share a globalnamespace and that you can manage as a single virtual server or multiplevirtual servers, providing performance, reliability, and scalability benefits.

HA (high availability)In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, the recovery capability provided by a pair ofnodes (storage systems), called an HA pair, that are configured to servedata for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning.

HA pairIn Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, a pair of nodes (storage systems) configuredto serve data for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning.

Storage termsAT-FCX

The controller module of the EXN1000 serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) storage expansion unit.

Disk Any hard disk drive

Disk shelf or shelfAny storage expansion unit containing hard disk drives.

ESH The controller module of Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units.

IOM The Input/Output module of SAS disk storage expansion units.

Loop or Fibre-Channel Arbitrated LoopOne or more daisy-chained Fibre Channel storage expansion unitsconnected to an N series storage system.

Node The system controller module that executes the software on an N seriessystem. There is one node in single-controller models; there are two nodesin active/active or high availability models.

About this book xxvii

Stack or SAS stackA stack of one or more SAS storage expansion units using IOM modulesconnected to the storage system. The maximum number of storageexpansion units in a stack of storage expansion units and the number ofstorage expansion unit stacks in a configuration are dependent on the typeof storage system.

Command conventionsYou can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtainaccess to the storage system using a Telnet session. In examples that illustratecommands executed on a UNIX workstation, the command syntax and outputmight differ, depending on your version of UNIX.

Formatting conventionsThe following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set offspecial information.

Formatting convention Type of information

Italic type v Words or characters that require specialattention.

v Placeholders for information you mustsupply. For example, if the guide requiresyou to enter the fctest adapternamecommand, you enter the characters“fctest” followed by the actual name ofthe adapter.

v Book titles in cross-references.

Monospaced font v Command and daemon names.

v Information displayed on the systemconsole or other computer monitors.

v The contents of files.

Bold monospaced font Words or characters you type. What youtype is always shown in lowercase letters,unless your program is case-sensitive anduppercase letters are necessary for it to workproperly.

Keyboard conventionsThis guide uses capitalization and some abbreviations to refer to the keys on thekeyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are inthis guide.

What appears in this guide... What it means...

hyphen (-) Used to separate individual keys. Forexample, Ctrl-D means holding down theCtrl key while pressing the D key.Note: Alternatively, this may be expressedas Ctrl+D.

Enter Used to refer to the key that generates acarriage return, although the key is namedReturn on some keyboards.

xxviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

What appears in this guide... What it means...

type Used to mean pressing one or more keys onthe keyboard.

enter Used to mean pressing one or more keysand then pressing the Enter key.

How to send your commentsYour feedback is important in helping us provide the most accurate andhigh-quality information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving thisdocument, send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected].

Be sure to include the following:v Exact publication titlev Publication form number (for example, GC26-1234-02)v Page, table, or illustration numbersv A detailed description of any information that should be changed

About this book xxix

mailto:[email protected]?subject=IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide

xxx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requirescareful planning. You are the most valuable resource in site planning because youhave the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system anddevices attached to it will be used.

Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document willprovide basic information required to do this preparation. You may want to alsoenlist the help of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representative,or other support personnel.

Your marketing representative is available to ensure that the hardware andsoftware that you have chosen will meet your needs.

Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks:1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system and

selecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described inChapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9 and Chapter 3, “IBM Nseries storage system software features,” on page 103.

2. Planning for the physical environment where the equipment will operate. Thisplanning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity,altitude, air flow, service clearance, and similar requirements as described inChapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 125.

3. Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected asdescribed in Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 183.

4. If required, planning for a dual-node (active/active or high availability)configuration for as described in “High availability or active/activeconfigurations” on page 7.

5. Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6,“AutoSupport,” on page 187.

This chapter also introduces the following topics:v “IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units”v “Storage expansion unit support” on page 2v “Data ONTAP” on page 5v “Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)” on page 6v “Interoperability” on page 6v “Adapter support” on page 6v “High availability or active/active configurations” on page 7

IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion unitsThe following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and storage expansionunits are described in Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9.v “N3300 hardware features” on page 9v “N3400 hardware features” on page 13v “N3600 hardware features” on page 16v “N3700 hardware features” on page 20

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 1

v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 24v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 28v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 31v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 35v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 38v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 42v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 45v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 50v “N6040 hardware features” on page 53v “N6060 hardware features” on page 58v “N6070 hardware features” on page 63v “N6210 hardware features” on page 68v “N6240 hardware features” on page 72v “N6270 hardware features” on page 76v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 81v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 86v “N7950T hardware features” on page 91v “EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 95v “EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 96v “EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 98v “EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 99v “EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 100

Storage expansion unit supportThe following N series disk storage expansion units are specifically designed forIBM N series systems:v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel (FC) disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN3000 SAS and SATA disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN3500 SAS disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unitv IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion

unit

Multiple EXN1000s, each having different SATA disk drive feature codes, may beattached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop.

Multiple EXN2000s and EXN4000s, each having different Fibre Channel disk drivefeature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same FibreChannel loop.

Within an EXN3000, SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 iseither a SAS storage controller or a SATA storage controller.

For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000s andEXN3500s and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM SystemStorage N series Universal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide.

2 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

For the latest N series storage expansion unit support information, visit the IBM Nseries support website, which is accessed and navigated as described in “Websites”on page xxiv.

Starting with Data ONTAP 7.3, gateway expands its support matrix to includestorage for native disk shelves and native disks. Gateways can now virtualizestorage from both third-party storage array venders and native disk shelves. TheData ONTAP software provides a unified storage software platform that simplifiesmanaging both native disk shelves and LUNs on storage arrays. You can addstorage when and where you need it, without disruption. See the GatewayImplementation Guide for Native Disk Shelves for additional information about thisfeature.

Intermixing EXN unitsEXN4000s and EXN2000s are both Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units.EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the sameloop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to thesame speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a supported N series systemconfiguration is supported as follows:v Intermixing Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units with SATA disk storage

expansion units on the same loop is not supported.v EXN4000s or EXN2000s (Fibre Channel disk drives) and EXN1000s (SATA disk

drives) may be attached to the same N series system only if the Fibre Channeldisk storage expansion units (EXN4000s or EXN2000s) are on separate loopsthan the SATA disk storage expansion units (EXN1000s).

Note: Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in an N3700configuration is not supported.

IBM N series systems with Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or higher that support SAS HBAsalso support stacks of EXN3000s as well as Fibre Channel loops of EXN1000s,EXN2000s, and EXN4000s. A single EXN3000 storage expansion unit must containonly SAS disk drives or only SATA disk drives. However, a stack of EXN3000storage expansion units can contain storage expansion units with SAS disk drivesand storage expansion units with SATA disk drives.

IBM N series systems with Data ONTAP 7.3.3.P2 or higher (except N3400 andN3600 storage systems, which require Data ONTAP 7.3.4 or higher) that supportSAS HBAs also support stacks of EXN3500s as well as Fibre Channel loops ofEXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s.

On IBM N series systems that support SAS HBAs, EXN3000s and EXN3500s aresupported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected inthe same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s.

Connecting storage expansion units to N series systemsThis section describes the requirements for connecting a storage expansion unit toN series systems and other storage expansion units. For detailed instructions abouthow to install and connect one or more storage expansion units in a rack, or toconnect a storage expansion unit to your filer storage system, see the Installationand Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your N seriescontrollers and storage expansion units.

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 3

v For connections to EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, IBM stronglyrecommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling whenever possible.

v See Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9 for details about themaximum number of drive loops, maximum number of storage expansion unitsor hard disk drives per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximumtotal number of hard disk drives for configurations using your N series system.

v Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to provide additionalredundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiplestorage expansion units.

v Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN2000s/EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 storageexpansion units in the same loop.

v EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the sameloop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to thesame speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

v For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 andEXN3500 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM SystemStorage N series Universal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide.

v For detailed information about the FC/SAS Atto Bridges, see the ATTOFibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operation Manual.

Note: One optical cable feature code order provides two cables. One SFP featurecode order provides two SFPs.

Storage expansion unit cabling requirementsYou must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections whenconnecting the storage expansion unit to an N series system or to other storageexpansion units.

For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and SetupInstructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system.

Connecting the storage expansion unit to the N series system: For EXN1000,EXN2000, and EXN4000:

When connecting EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units to anN series system, you must use appropriate cables and connectors according to thefollowing guidelines.v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with early CPU module

designs: Use a NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable (#2020 or 2022). Forattachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cableis required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP FibreChannel copper cables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with current CPU moduledesigns: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs forattachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel opticalcables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

v For direct connections to all other N series systems: Use LC-to-LC FibreChannel optical cables and SFPs.

Note: For information about the differences between early and late CPU moduledesigns, see “Understanding the differences between early and currentN3700 CPU modules” on page 21.

For EXN3000 and EXN3500:


||

For information about cabling EXN3000s and EXN3500s, see the IBM SystemStorage N series Universal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide.

Connecting the storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units: ForEXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000:

When connecting a storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units, IBMstrongly recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and fourSFPs (two SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable).

Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections(to a maximum of three meters) between storage expansion units.

You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per storageexpansion unit.

For EXN3000 and EXN3500:

Connections between EXN3000s are made using SAS and ACP cables. Forinformation about cabling EXN3000s and EXN3500s, see the IBM System Storage Nseries Universal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide.

For detailed information about the FC/SAS Atto Bridges, see the ATTO FibreBridge6500N Installation and Operation Manual.

Connecting a gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Data ONTAPN series storage systems are driven by the Data ONTAP operating system. DataONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that canhandle mixed SAN and NAS environments. Data ONTAP delivers flexiblemanagement and high availability, ensures business continuance, and providesdata permanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in yourenterprise. Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows, andweb environments and provides the foundation to build your storageinfrastructure and an enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical businessapplications. The operating system includes integrated secure access capabilities(SSL, SSH) and FilerView, a web-based element manager.

The innovative Data ONTAP architecture delivers scalable performance and aflexible storage environment, that can be applied in many environments rangingfrom small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and servesapplications, consolidates data, and provides reliable data access throughout theenterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management and


||


optimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and amicrokernel design, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability,and heterogeneous access.

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high level ofdata availability while providing dynamic and flexible data storage containersusing Flexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated,nonvolatile RAM and a block-level checksum capability. The WAFL file system isdesigned specifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on thealgorithms and data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which areread-only clones of the active file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique tominimize the disk space that Snapshots consume.

InteroperabilityThe latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessedfrom the following web page:


Adapter supportMost IBM System Storage N series controller models feature PCI adapter slots.Adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, to dual-controller models, so thatboth nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCI adapters.

There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3300, N3400, and N3700 systems. Noadditional adapter options are supported for the N3300, N3400, and N3700systems.

There is one available PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system.The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix D,“Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 209.

There are three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N5200 and N5500storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCI-X adapter slots.A20/G20 models have six available PCI-X adapter slots.) The PCI-X adapterssupported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E,“Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 215.

There are three available PCIe adapter slots per node on the N5300 and N5600storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCIe adapter slots.A20/G20 models have six available PCIe adapter slots.) The PCIe adapterssupported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F,“Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 223.

There are five available PCIe adapter slots and three available PCI-X adapter slotsper node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter slot oneach N7700 or N7900 node is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter and is notavailable for PCIe adapter card use). The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported bythe N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 255.



There are three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot per nodeon the N6000 series storage systems. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6000series storage systems are described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cardssupported by N6000 series systems,” on page 233.

There are two PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N6200 series storagesystems. N6240 and N6270 Exx models also include one I/O expansion module percontroller node; each I/O expansion module provides four additional PCIe slots.

Note: The I/O expansion module is not available on N6210 Cxx models.

The PCIe adapters supported by the N6200 series storage systems are described inAppendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” onpage 245.

There are two available vertical expansion slots and four PCIe expansion slots percontroller node on the N7x50T storage systems. The N7x50T also includes one I/Oexpansion module per controller node; each I/O expansion module provides twoadditional vertical slots and eight PCIe slots, which means a total of 4 availablevertical slots and twelve PCIe slots for adapter expansion per node. One verticalslot per controller is occupied by the NVRAM card and the other three verticalslots are reserved for features 1079 and 1080.

Any and all adapter cards (hardware features) added to an N7950T configurationmust be added in equal numbers to the two nodes of the N7950T. The two nodesmust be identically configured.

The PCIe adapters supported by the N7x50T storage systems are described inAppendix J, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems,” onpage 269.

High availability or active/active configurationsBefore beginning hardware planning, decide if the higher availability obtained byclustering two N series storage system nodes is needed. These higher availabilityconfigurations are referred to as HA (high availability) pairs in Data ONTAP 8.x7-Mode, as active/active configurations in Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3, and as clusteredconfigurations in Data ONTAP 7.1.

An HA pair (or active/active configuration) consists of two storage systems(nodes) whose controllers are connected to each other either directly or, in the caseof a fabric-attached MetroCluster, through switches and FC-VI interconnectadapters. You can configure the HA pair so that each node in the pair shares accessto a common set of storage, subnets, and tape drives, or each node can own itsown distinct set of storage. The nodes are connected to each other through aNVRAM adapter, or, in the case of systems with two controllers in a single chassis,through an internal interconnect. This allows one node to serve data that resideson the disks of its failed partner node. Each node continually monitors its partner,mirroring the data for each other’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM or NVMEM).

Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher availabilityusing the Cluster Failover (CFO) software feature.

Active/active or high availability configuration IBM N5000 and N7000 seriesmodels contain two nodes, with each node contained in a different enclosure. Bothnodes must be the same N series model. The two nodes are clustered through an


Infiniband (IB) cluster cable that is attached to the NVRAM5 adapter (for N5200and N5500 models) or NVRAM6 adapter (for N5300, N5600 and N7000 seriesmodels), which allows one node to serve data to the disks of its failed partnernode.

Active/active or high availability configuration IBM N3300, N3400, N3600, N3700,and N6000 series systems all contain both clustered (active/active or highavailability) nodes in the same enclosure.

IBM N6200 series HA models that do not include Input/Output expansionmodules contain both nodes in the same enclosure. Dual-controller IBM N6200series models that do include Input/Output expansion modules contain controllernodes in separate enclosures.

IBM N7x50T has one model only (N7950T Model E22). It is a dual node, dualenclosure system. It has one controller module and one Input/Output expansionmodule in each enclosure.

Configuring storage systems in an HA pair (or active/active configuration)provides the following benefits:v Fault tolerance

When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeover occurs, and the partnernode continues to serve the failed node’s data.

v Nondisruptive software upgradesWhen you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues toserve data for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For moreinformation about nondisruptive upgrades, see the Data ONTAP Upgrade Guideor Upgrade and Revert/Downgrade Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.

v Nondisruptive storage system and disk maintenanceWhen you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues toserve data for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the nodeyou halted.

More information about active/active or high availability configurations isprovided in the following documents:v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode High Availability

Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and AdministrationGuide

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00


Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features

This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products.v “N3300 hardware features”v “N3400 hardware features” on page 13v “N3600 hardware features” on page 16v “N3700 hardware features” on page 20v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 24v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 28v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 31v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 35v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 38v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 42v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 45v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 50v “N6040 hardware features” on page 53v “N6060 hardware features” on page 58v “N6070 hardware features” on page 63v “N6210 hardware features” on page 68v “N6240 hardware features” on page 72v “N6270 hardware features” on page 76v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 81v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 86v “N7950T hardware features” on page 91v “EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 95v “EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 96v “EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 98v “EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 99v “EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 100

This chapter also provides rack mounting information in “Rack mountrequirements” on page 102.

N3300 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocolsupport, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p®, System i® (NFS only), System x® and System z® (NFSonly) servers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability isavailable at:



For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, FibreChannel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channeland iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.

N3300 A10The N3300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3300Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The base chassis includes:v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processorv 1 GB random access ECC memoryv Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel portsv One serial console portv One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgradefrom a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3300 A20The N3300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3300Model A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) andthe Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of twoPCMs that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.

The N3300 Model A20 includes:v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processorsv 2 GB random access ECC memoryv Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel portsv Two serial console portsv Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial AdvancedTechnology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN2000 andEXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storageexpansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four.

Note: The N3300 does not support attachment of SAS-based storage expansionunits.



The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or2 TB physical capacities.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountabledisk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channeldisk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel diskdrive speeds and capacities:v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600 GB

capacitiesv 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of aparticular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBMSystem Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containingmore than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

Table 1 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for theN3300 Model A10 and Model A20.

Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosureDisk drivecapacity

Maximumstorageenclosures

Maximum diskdrives

Maximumphysicalcapacity1

Internal 144 GB SAS diskdrives

n/a 12 1.72 TB


n/a 12 3.60 TB


n/a 12 5.40 TB


n/a 12 7.20 TB

Internal 500 GB SATAdisk drives

n/a 12 6 TB


n/a 12 9 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA diskdrives

n/a 12 12 TB


n/a 12 24 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATAdisk drives

4 56 14 TB


4 56 42 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA diskdrives

4 56 56 TB


4 28 56 TB

EXN2000 144 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

4 56 8.06 TB

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 11

Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity (continued)



Maximum diskdrives



4 56 16.8 TB


4 56 8.06 TB


4 56 16.8 TB


4 56 25.2 TB


4 56 33.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (68, including 12 internal drives and 56 drives in storageexpansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 68 TB. Both limits must behonored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

N3300 feature codesTable 2. N3300 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2859 A10, A20 1044

31m 50-micron Fibre Channelcable (LC/LC)

2859 A10, A20 1051

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4017

500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4020

2 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4021

HDD Blank Panel 2859 A10, A20 4099

Table 3. N3300 installation features codes


Field install rack mount kit 2859 A10, A20 9202


The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord listfor N series storage systems,” on page 191.

N3400 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N3400 storage controller includes the Model A11, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A21, an active/active (or high availability)dual-node base unit. The two models of the N3400 are designed to provide fastdata access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, andlow maintenance requirements. Additional functions, such as snapshot, mirroring,and business continuance capability, are available through optional licensedfunctions.

The N3400 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)servers. Details and current information on N3400 interoperability is available at:



N3400 A11The N3400 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3400Model A11 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The base chassis includes:v Two 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processorsv 8 GB random access ECC memoryv Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel portsv One SAS port - Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP)v One serial console portv Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The N3400 Model A11 may be upgraded to an N3400 Model A21. The upgradefrom a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3400 A21The N3400 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N3400Model A11, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) andthe Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 consists of twoPCMs that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. The Model A21 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.

The N3400 Model A21 includes:v Four 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processorsv 16 GB random access ECC memory



v Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel portsv Two SAS ports -- Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP)v Two serial console portsv Four integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400The N3400 storage controller Models A11 and A21 can attach a maximum of eightSerial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) or Fibre Channel storageexpansion units, either EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000. The maximum number ofEXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units that can be attached is four. On theinitial order of an N3400, either SAS-attached or Fibre Channel-attached expansionunits may be ordered, not both. For an initial order, no more than six FibreChannel-attached expansion units may be ordered.

Both N3400 models support either one backend FC loop (for EXN1000, EXN2000,or EXN4000 storage expansion units) or one SAS stack (for EXN3000 or EXN3500storage expansion units). EXN3000s and EXN3500s cannot be connected in thesame SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share aFibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable diskenclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel diskdrives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drivespeeds and capacities:v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600

GB capacitiesv 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities

The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS disk drives. Thesupported disk drive physical capacities are 450 GB and 600 GB.

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (24 for SAS) disk drives, allof a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBMSystem Storage N3400, you may not include storage expansion units containingmore than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

Table 4 on page 15 describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N3400 Model A11 and Model A21.



Diskenclosure Disk drive capacity


Maximumdisk drives


Internal 300 GB SAS disk drives n/a 12 3.60 TB



Internal 500 GB SATA disk drives n/a 12 6 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA disk drives n/a 12 12 TB

Internal 2 TB SATA disk drives n/a 12 24 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATA disk drives 8 112 28 TB



EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk drives 8 112 112 TB

EXN1000 2 TB SATAdisk drives

In a systemrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

8 56 136 TB

In a systemrunning DataONTAP 8.0.x7-Mode

8 112 272 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS disk drives 4 96 28.80 TB






In a systemrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

4 48 136 TB

In a systemrunning DataONTAP 8.0.x7-Mode

4 96 272 TB

EXN3500 450 GB Fibre Channel diskdrives

4 96 43.20 TB


4 96 57.60 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

144 GB Fibre Channel diskdrives

8 112 16.12 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000


8 112 33.60 TB


8 112 50.40 TB


8 112 67.20 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3400 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (136) and a maximum physical storage limit of 136 TB.Both limits must be honored.






2859 A11, A21 1051

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A11, A21 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4017

600 GB FDE SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4117

500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4020

2 TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4021






N3600 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocolsupport, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)servers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is available at:



N3600 A10The Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSIsupport, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3600 ModelA10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.The base chassis includes:



v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processorv 2 GB random access ECC memoryv Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel portsv One serial console portv One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SASstack.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3600 A20The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3600 Model A10,but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and theClustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports amaximum of 104 drives. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed toprovide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. TheModel A20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller.

The Model A20 includes:v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processorsv 4 GB random access ECC memoryv Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel portsv Two PCIe expansion slotsv Two serial console portsv Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two(one per node).

The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SASstack.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012or 1013).

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or


2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share aFibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units.

Note: EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loopwith EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.



The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities


For the initial order of the N3600, you may not include storage expansion unitscontaining more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

Table 7 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for theN3600 Model A10 and Model A20.




Maximum diskdrives



n/a 20 2.88 TB


n/a 20 6.00 TB


n/a 20 9.00 TB


n/a 20 12 TB


n/a 20 10 TB


n/a 20 15 TB


n/a 20 20 TB


6 84 21.00 TB


6 84 42.00 TB





Maximum diskdrives



6 84 63.00 TB


6 84 84 TB


6 42 84 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SASdrives

6 84 25.20 TB


6 84 37.80 TB


6 84 50.4 TB

EXN3000 500 GB SATAdrives

6 84 42.00 TB

EXN3000 1 TB SATAdrives

6 84 84 TB


6 42 84 TB


6 84 37.80 TB


6 84 50.4 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

144 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

6 84 12.09 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

300 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

6 84 25.20 TB


6 84 37.80 TB


6 84 50.4 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 isdetermined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (104, 20 internal and 84 viastorage expansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 104 TB. Both limits mustbe honored.

N3600 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N3600 cables, connectors, and harddisk drives. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N3600, seeAppendix D, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 209.


Table 8. N3600 feature codes




2862 A10, A20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2862 A10, A20 1053



FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1m

2862 A10, A20 1071


2862 A10, A20 1072


2862 A10, A20 1073

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2862 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4017

500 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4020






N3700 hardware featuresThe N3700 consists of the Model A10 or Model A20, and its associated software.

The Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, iSCSIand FCP support in a 3U, integrated filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. Thisbase chassis includes redundant hot-plug power supplies with fans and twointegrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports.

The N3700 Model A10 is capable of being upgraded to an N3700 Model A20. TheModel A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3700 Model A10, butwith the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N3700Model A20 consists of two processing nodes in the same enclosure that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallreliability.


The N3700 can be configured with as few as four disk drives in the Model A10and eight in the Model A20, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (28 disk drives inthe A20). Disk drive types include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM). Within any single N3700, all disk drivesmust be of the same type.

Note: Any N3700 drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must bepopulated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remainingdrive bays.

The N3700 load board feature enables the N3700 (A10 and A20) to operate in aSATA-only storage environment. If the N3700 load board is ordered, the N3700 isordered with no Fibre Channel hard drives and only EXN1000s (SATA drives) areattached to the storage controller. For more information about the N3700 loadboard, see “Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700” on page 22.

Attention: If your N3700 storage system shipped with load boards, exactly twoN3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) are installed inthe system. The two load boards must be installed in bays 0 and 1.


Understanding the differences between early and currentN3700 CPU modules

N3700 storage systems with system serial numbers between 13-00001 and 13-01000shipped with an early CPU module design. (In general, these are N3700 systemsthat shipped prior to January 31, 2006.) Current N3700 systems (with system serialnumbers 13-01001 and higher) ship with the current CPU module design, whichuses different Fibre Channel connectors. (In general, these are N3700 systems thatshipped after January 31, 2006.)

Regardless of the CPU module design, all N3700 storage systems offer the samefunctionality. Field repairs or upgrades may use the current CPU module designon any N3700 system.

The early CPU module is easily distinguished from the current CPU moduledesign by the rear port labeling, shown in Figure 2. The early CPU module uses anintegrated SFP for Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices), and it usesa special HSS connector for Fibre Channel Port B to connect the N3700 to storageexpansion units.

The current CPU module design uses pluggable SFP connections for both FibreChannel ports. The current CPU module labeling is shown in Figure 3 on page 22.The SFP required for connections to the Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-partydevices) is included with all N3700s that ship with the current CPU module

Figure 2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs


design. For Port B (used for connections to storage expansion units), an SFP isrequired only for connections using optical cables (recommended). The SFP forPort B is shipped with the cables ordered with your storage expansion unit.

Attention: Depending on the design of your N3700 CPU module, directconnections to storage expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channelcopper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in the following bullets:v For direct connections to N3700 early CPU module designs: Use NAS-to-EXP

Fibre Channel copper cables (FC 2020 or 2022). For attachment to an N3700Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required. Forattachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel coppercables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 current CPU module designs: Use an LC-to-LCFibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700 ModelA10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs forattachment to an N3700 Model A20.

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700Physical capacity of the N3700 can be scaled up to 16.8 TB with the attachment ofup to three IBM System Storage N series EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storageexpansion units.

An N3700 storage system configuration supports a maximum of 56 disk drives(including the possible fourteen disk drives in the N3700). The maximum rawphysical storage capacity of 16.8 TB includes the capacity of any internal drives inthe N3700.

Note: The N3700 does not support attachment of EXN3000 or EXN3500 storageexpansion units.

v EXN4000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four diskdrives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 144 GB, 300 GB,450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity.

v EXN2000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four diskdrives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 72 GB, 144 GB, 300GB, 450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity.

v EXN1000 storage expansion units can be configured with a minimum of five, upto a maximum of 14, SATA disk drives of the same capacity. SATA disk drivesare available in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, and 1 TB capacities.

Note: Any storage expansion unit drive bays that do not contain hard disk drivesmust be populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering theremaining drive bays.

Figure 3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs


The N3700 does not support the attachment of mixed storage expansion unit types.All storage expansion units connected to a single N3700 must be either EXN4000s,EXN2000s or EXN1000s.

Attention: Depending on the CPU module design of your N3700 storage system,direct connections to storage expansion units must be made with either FibreChannel copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in“Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules”on page 21.

If you are attaching EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units to the N3700, theN3700 base unit must either:v have the minimum number of Fibre Channel disk drives installed (four for a

Model A10 and eight for a Model A20); orv have two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099)

In the case where the objective is to have as much low cost SATA storage aspossible, the N3700 can be configured with no Fibre Channel disk drives. In orderto configure the N3700 system (the base unit and storage expansion units) with noFibre Channel disk drives, you must order two HDD load boards (FC 4020) and 12HDD blank fillers (FC 4099).




2863 A10, A20 1051

72 GB, 10K RPM Fibre ChannelHDD

2863 A10, A20 4000


2863 A10, A20 4001


2863 A10, A20 4002


2863 A10, A20 4003


2863 A10, A20 4004

N3700 load board 2863 A10, A20 4020

Drive Blank Cover 2863 A10, A20 4099




The power cord features for the N3700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cordlist for N series storage systems,” on page 191.


N5200 filer hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5200 filers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20,and associated software.

The N5200 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability isavailable at:



N5200 A10The N5200 Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model A10 does not include storage in the base chassis. The basechassis includes:v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processorv 2 GB of ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems aredescribed in Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 andN5500 systems,” on page 215.

The Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channelstorage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-pathFibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs forDisk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The four onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channelports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attachingto Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a FibreChannel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCPtargets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment



(FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channelstorage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1007).


N5200 A20The N5200 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model A20 includes:v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per nodev 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per nodev 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per nodev Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per nodev Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiatorsv Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per nodev Redundant cooling fansv Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters

(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, betweenthe two processing N5000 nodes

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis six.


The Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channelstorage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-pathFibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs forDisk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps FibreChannel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attachingto Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a FibreChannel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCPtargets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment


(FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channelstorage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5200 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cablesare ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filerThe N5200 filer Models A10 and A20 require at least one storage expansion unitper node, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.


Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all diskdrives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although theoriginal order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion unitswith no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives,later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet thisrequirement.

Table 12 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for boththe N5200.

Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity

Disk enclosureDisk drive

capacity

Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum disk

drives


EXN1000 250 GB SATA diskdrives

12 168 42 TB


12 168 53.76 TB


12 168 84 TB


12 168 126 TB


12 168 168 TB


12 84 168 TB


12 168 12.09 TB


12 168 24.19 TB


Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity (continued)


capacity

Maximumstorage


drives



12 168 50.40 TB


12 168 24.19 TB


12 168 50.40 TB


12 168 75.60 TB


12 168 100.80 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5200 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (168) and a maximum physical storage limit of 168 TB.Both limits must be honored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5200 filer. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability ofthe storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5200 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5200 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5200, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 215.

Table 13. N5200 filer feature codes


2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1040


Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 A20 1042


30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2864 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2864 A20 1050


Table 13. N5200 filer feature codes (continued)



2864 A10, A20 1051

Table 14. N5200 filer installation features codes




N5200 gateway hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5200 gateways consist of the Model G10 and ModelG20, and associated software.

The N5200 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability isavailable at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not besupported on third-party storage devices.



N5200 G10The N5200 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processorv 2 GB of ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators



v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters


For the N5200 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis three.


The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiatorsfor attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channelapplication hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1007).

N5200 G20The N5200 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rackspace.

The N5200 Model G20 includes:v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per nodev 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per nodev 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per nodev Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per nodev Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be





For the N5200 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis six.




The Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cablesare ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N5000 series gateway.



N5200 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5200 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5200, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 215.

Table 15. N5200 gateway feature codes


2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1040


Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 G20 1042

30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2864 G10, G20 1047

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050

31m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable(LC/LC)

2864 G10, G20 1051

Table 16. N5200 gateway installation features codes


Field install rack mount kit 2864 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Powercord list for N series storage systems,” on page 191.



N5300 filer hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5300 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, andassociated software.




N5300 A10The N5300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5300 Model A10 does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This basechassis includes:v Two 2.4 GHz 64-bit processorsv 4 GB of ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portv One serial console portv Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. A fourthexpansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5300) 512 MB NVRAMadapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described inAppendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600systems,” on page 223.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channelloops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support amaximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023).



The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5300 Model A20. The upgrade from aModel A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an N5300storage system.

N5300 A20The N5300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the N5300 Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5300 Model A20 includes:v Four 2.4 GHz 64-bit processorsv 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memoryv 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Two serial console portsv Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six.


The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channelloops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional FibreChannel HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The ten loops willsupport a maximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1023).



Connecting storage expansion units to the N5300 filerBoth N5300 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storageexpansion unit.

Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storageexpansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than twodifferent types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to addadditional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Table 17 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for theN5300.



Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximumdisk drives







In systemsrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

24 168 336 TB

In systemsrunning DataONTAP 8.0.x7-Mode

24 336 672 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS drives 24 336 100.8 TB



EXN3000 500 GB SATA drives 24 336 168 TB

EXN3000 1 TB SATA drives 24 336 336 TB



24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 48.384 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 100.8 TB




Maximumstorage




24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5300 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 672 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode. Bothlimits must be honored.


A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storageexpansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total SASstorage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration.EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, butthey cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must containonly EXN3000s or EXN3500s.


N5300 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5300 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5300, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 223.


Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code






30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernetcable

2869 A10, A20 1047

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2869 A20 1050


2869 A10, A20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 2869 A10, A20 1053


Table 18. N5300 filer feature codes (continued)




FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1m2

2869 A10, A20 1071


2869 A10, A20 1072


2869 A10, A20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2869 A10, A20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.

Table 19. N5300 filer installation feature codes





The Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCPand iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheModel G20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-node base unit.

The N5300 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 gatewayinteroperability is available at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are notsupported on third-party storage devices.

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, FibreChannel over Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series FibreChannel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.



N5300 Model G10The N5300 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v Two AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of

level 2 cachev Four GB random access ECC memoryv Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per nodev 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion

HBA features)v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or


Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5300Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems aredescribed in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 andN5600 systems,” on page 223.

The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5300 Model G20The N5300 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5300Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rackspace.

The N5300 Model G20 includes:v Four AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of

level 2 cachev Eight GB random access ECC memoryv Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loopsv 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion


initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans


v Redundant cooling fansv Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus

Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three pernode (always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, betweenthe two processing N5000 series nodes


All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximumnumber of adapters that may be added to the N5300 Model G20 is six. Whenadapter cards are ordered for the Model G20 on the initial order, they must beordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated withthe same number of each type of PCIe adapters.




See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N5000 series gateway system.



N5300 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5300 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5300, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 223.







Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2869 G10, G20 1044




2869 G10, G20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 2869 G10, G20 1053



Table 20. N5300 gateway feature codes (continued)





2869 G10, G20 1071


2869 G10, G20 1072


2869 G10, G20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2869 G10, G20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.









N5500 A10The N5500 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5500 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassisincludes:v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processorsv 4 GB of ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiators



v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters


For the N5500 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis three.


The N5500 Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) FibreChannel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number ofdual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps FibreChannel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attachingto Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a FibreChannel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCPtargets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment(FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channelstorage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit EthernetNetwork Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernetports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs(feature number 1007).


N5500 A20The N5500 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The N5500 Model A20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storagesystem.

The N5500 Model A20 includes:v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per nodev 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per nodev 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per nodev Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per nodev Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be

configured as targets or initiators


v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per nodev Redundant cooling fansv Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters


v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, betweenthe two processing nodes


For the N5500 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis six.


The N5500 Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) FibreChannel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number ofdual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attachingdisk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targetsfor attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or througha Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configuredas FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for DiskAttachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path FibreChannel storage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).


Connecting storage expansion units to the N5500 filerBoth N5500 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.


Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all diskdrives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although theoriginal order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion unitswith no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives,later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not have to meet thisrequirement.





capacity

Maximumstorage


drives



24 336 84 TB


24 336 107.52 TB


24 336 168 TB


24 336 259 TB


24 336 336 TB


24 168 336 TB


24 336 24.19 TB


24 336 48.38 TB


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 48.38 TB


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5500 Model is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB.Both limits must be honored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5500 filer. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability ofthe storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two


redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5500 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5500 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5500, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 215.







30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2865 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2865 A20 1050


2865 A10, A20 1051

FCoE SFP+ copper cable, 1 m 2865 A10, A20 1053




2865 A10, A20 1071


2865 A10, A20 1072


2865 A10, A20 1073





N5500 gateway hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5500 gateways consist of the Model G10 or Model G20,and associated software.





N5500 G10The N5500 Model G10 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.The N5500 gateway does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This basechassis includes:v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processorsv 4 GB of ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters


For the N5500 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis three.



The N5500 Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit EthernetNetwork Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernetports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs(feature number 1007).

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storagesystem.

N5500 G20The N5500 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model G10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The N5500 Model G20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5500 Model G20 includes:


v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per nodev 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per nodev 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per nodev Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per nodev Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be





For the N5500 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adaptersis six.



The N5500 Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).






N5500 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5500 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5500, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 215.












2865 G10, G20 1051

Table 26. N5500 gateway installation feature codes








N5600 A10The N5600 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5600 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassisincludes:v Two 1.8 GHz 64-bit processorsv 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or

initiatorsv Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fansv Redundant cooling fans



v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portv One serial console portv Front LCD message display

For the N5600 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters isthree. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5600)512 MB NVRAM adapter card.


The N5600 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path FibreChannel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional FibreChannel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops willsupport a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023).


Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an N5600storage system.

N5600 A20The N5600 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The N5600 Model A20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improveoverall availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable filer. Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5600 Model A20 includes:v Four 1.8 GHz 64-bit processorsv 16 GB of DDR-400 ECC memoryv 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsv Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or


Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) portsv Two serial console portsv Front LCD message display


For the N5600 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters issix.


The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channelloops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional FibreChannel HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014).

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1023).




The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 Model is determined by themaximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximum physical storagelimit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode. Both limits must be honored.

Table 27. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling)


Maximumstorage









36 252 504 TB


36 504 1008 TB





Table 27. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling) (continued)


Maximumstorage







36 252 504 TB


36 504 1008 TB


36 504 226.8 TB


36 504 302.4 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


36 504 72.57 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


36 504 151.2 TB


36 504 226.8 TB


36 504 302.4 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (504) and a maximum physical storage limit of 504 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode. Bothlimits must be honored.

Table 28. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling)


Maximumstorage









24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB





Table 28. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling) (continued)


Maximumstorage







24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB


24 336 151.6 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 48.38 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 In a system with redundant cabling, the maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 isdetermined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximumphysical storage limit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB insystems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode. Both limits must be honored.


A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storageexpansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and totalEXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controllerconfiguration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same systemconfiguration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SASstack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s.



N5600 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5600 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5600, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 223.








30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernetcable

2868 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP(4-Gbps)

2868 A20 1050


2868 A10, A20 1051





2868 A10, A20 1071


2868 A10, A20 1072


2868 A10, A20 1073







The N5600 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.The N5600 Model G20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-nodebase unit.


The N5600 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N5600 gatewayinteroperability is available at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not besupported on third-party storage devices.


N5600 Model G10The N5600 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v Two AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cachev 8 GB of DDR-400 memoryv Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per nodev 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion



Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the N5600Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.


The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5600 Model G20The N5600 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5600Model G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodesthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve



overall availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3Urack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rackspace.

The N5600 Model G20 includes:v Four AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cachev 16 GB of DDR-400 memoryv Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loopsv 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (20 with the addition of expansion

HBA features)v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or


Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three pernode (always ordered and installed in pairs)



All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximumnumber of adapters that may be added to the Model G20 is six. When adaptercards are ordered for Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered andadded in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the samenumber of each type of PCIe adapters.









N5600 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5600 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5600, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 223.







Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2868 G10, G20 1044


4-Gbps Extended long-wave SFP 2868 G20 1050


2868 G10, G20 1051





2868 G10, G20 1071


2868 G10, G20 1072


2868 G10, G20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2868 G10, G20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.





N6040 hardware featuresThe N6040 storage controllers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20 andassociated software with gateway options. The N6040 is a 6U storage controllerthat must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controllerdoes not include storage in the base chassis.

Note: All N6040 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used asgateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with thesuffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).

The IBM System Storage N6040 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,


FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFSonly), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N series filer system.



N6040 Model A10The N6040 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.

The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processorv 4 GB of random access ECC memoryv Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slotv One serial console portv One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A10is four.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are described inAppendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,”on page 233.

The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops via the addition of four optional Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A10 supports amaximum of 420 total disk drives.

The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernetports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

The N6040 Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from aModel A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N6040 Model A20The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide a dual-node storage controller withiSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.

The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover



(CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 drives. TheModel A20 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U inheight. They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helpingimprove overall availability.

The base chassis includes:v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node)v 8 GB of random access ECC memory (4 GB per node)v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node)v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node)v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots

(one per node)v Two serial console ports (one per node)v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node)

The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A20is eight (four per node).


The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) via the addition of eightoptional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029).The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernetports via the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit EthernetNetwork Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040Both N6040 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansionunit per node.


The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable diskenclosures containing a minimum of five, up to a maximum of fourteen, FibreChannel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following FibreChannel disk drive speeds and capacities:v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600


The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:


v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB drives require Data

ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher)






Maximumstorage









30 210 420 TB


30 420 840 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS drives 30 420 126 TB







30 210 420 TB


30 420 840 TB


*Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode orhigher

30 420 1260 TB


30 420 189 TB




Maximumstorage




30 420 252 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


30 420 60.48 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


30 420 126 TB


30 420 189 TB


30 420 252 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6040 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (420) and a maximum physical storage limit of 420 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1260 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode orhigher. Both limits must be honored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a singleFibre Channel loop.

A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 EXN3000 or EXN3500 storageexpansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and totalEXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controllerconfiguration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same systemconfiguration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SASstack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6040 system. Dual-pathFibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability andserviceability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller bycreating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of thestorage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path FibreChannel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with yoursystem.

N6040 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6040 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6040, see Appendix G, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” on page 233.v Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on

page 255





Table 34. N6040 feature codes (continued)


30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)

2858 A10, A20 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2858 A10 1050


2858 A10, A20 1051





2858 A10, A20 1071


2858 A10, A20 1072


2858 A10, A20 1073


Table 35. N6040 installation feature codes


Plant install in 2101 rack 2858 A10, A20 9201





The IBM System Storage N6060 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFSonly), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.







The N6060 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6060 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processorv 8 GB of random access ECC memoryv Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Three PCI-e X8 expansion slots and one PCI-e X4 expansion slotv One serial console portv One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port




The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernetports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature numbers 1023).



The N6060 Model A22 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A12,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) licensed function. The Model A22 consists of two storage controllers housedin a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to provide failover and failbackfunction, helping improve overall availability.

The base chassis includes:v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node)v 16 GB of random access ECC memory (8 GB per node)


v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node)v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node)v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots

(one per node)v Two serial console ports (one per node)v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node)









The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB drives require Data

ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher)







Maximumstorage









48 336 672 TB


48 672 1344 TB

EXN3000 100 GB SSD2 *Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode orhigher

4 96 9.6 TB








48 336 672 TB


48 672 1344 TB


Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode orhigher

48 672 2016 TB


48 672 302 TB


48 672 403 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


48 672 100 TB


|



Maximumstorage



EXN4000andEXN2000


48 672 201 TB


48 672 302 TB


48 672 403 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6060 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (672) and a maximum physical storage limit of 672 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2016 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode orhigher. Both limits must be honored.2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) drives require at least one stack of rotatingdisk drives in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD drives tofunction properly, a minimum of four SSD drives must be installed in the disk shelf.




N6060 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6060 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6060, see Appendix G, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” on page 233.





2858 A12, A22 1047



2858 A12, A22 1051


|||







2858 A12, A22 1071


2858 A12, A22 1072


2858 A12, A22 1073
















The N6070 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6070 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processorsv 16 GB of random access ECC memoryv Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fansv Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slotv One serial console portv One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port




The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet portsvia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).



The N6070 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A11,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 supports a maximum of 420 drives. TheModel A21 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U inheight. They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helpingimprove overall availability.

The base chassis includes:v Four dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (two per node)v 32 GB of random access ECC memory (16 GB per node)v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node)v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node)v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans


v Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots(one per node)

v Two serial console ports (one per node)v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node)










ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.)


Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storageexpansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two


different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to addadditional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.




Maximumstorage









60 420 840 TB


60 840 1680 TB

EXN3000 100 GB SSDdrives2


4 96 9.6 TB








60 420 840 TB


60 840 1680 TB



60 840 2520 TB


60 840 378 TB


60 840 504 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


60 840 120.96 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


60 840 252 TB


||



Maximumstorage




60 840 378 TB


60 840 504 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6070 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (840) and a maximum physical storage limit of 840 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2520 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode orhigher. Both limits must be honored.2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) drives require at least one stack of rotatingdisk drives in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD drives tofunction properly, a minimum of four SSD drives must be installed in the disk shelf.




N6070 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6070 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6070, see Appendix G, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” on page 233.





2858 A11, A21 1047



2858 A11, A21 1051





|||




2858 A11, A21 1071


2858 A11, A21 1072


2858 A11, A21 1073







N6210 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver System p,System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

The N6210 systems consist of the Model C10, Model C20, and associated software.Both models can be configured, via optional features, to be either storagecontrollers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failover (CFO)support (via required feature), designed to provide failover and failback function,helping improve overall availability. Both models must be mounted in a standard19-inch rack. None of the N6210 models include storage in the base chassis.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N series system.



N6210 modelsIBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers include:v Model C20 - An active/active dual-node base unitv Model C10 - A single-node base unit

The Model C10 can be upgraded to a Model C20; model upgrades are disruptive.



Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6210 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis.

Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used asgateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with thesuffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).

Both N6210 models feature:v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the

needs of business-critical and mission-critical applicationsv Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file

serving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructuresv High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical

applicationsv Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached

Storage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer SystemInterface (iSCSI)

v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and SerialAdvanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed toallow deployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit,and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must beattached to the N series system.

Table 42. N6210 physical attributes

Attribute C10 C20

Number of controllers 1 2

Rack space required 3U 3U

Dual core 2.3 GHz CPU 1 2

Random access memory (GB) 4 8

4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 2 4

6-Gb SAS ports 2 4

Disk drives supported 240 240

1-Gb Ethernet ports 2 4

PCIe expansion slots 2 4

Serial console ports 1 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 1 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes

Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note thateach platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed.

Attribute C10 C20

FC loops 10 10

FC loops (dual-path) 5 5


Attribute C10 C20

SAS stacks 5 n/a

SAS stacks (dual-path) n/a 4

10-Gb Ethernet ports 4 8

10-Gb FCoE ports 4 8

EXN1000 storage expansion units 17 17





Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210The N6210 storage controllers may be ordered without an accompanyingexpansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational.The EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining five, and up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physicalcapacities.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountabledisk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. Theysupport FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm).


ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode and later)


Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM SystemStorage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more thantwo types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of N6210 systems is determined by thenumber of disk drives supported. N6210 systems support a maximum of 240 harddrive spindles.

The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N6210:




Maximumstorage


drives

Maximumphysicalcapacity


EXN1000 750 GB SATA disk drives 17 238 178.5 TB


EXN1000 2 TB SATA disk drives In systemsrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

17 119 238 TB


17 238 476 TB







20 120 240 TB


20 240 480 TB

EXN3000 3 TB SATA disk drives *Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode orhigher

20 240 720 TB

EXN3500 450 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 20 240 108 TB





EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a singleFibre Channel loop.

An SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storageexpansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and totalEXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controllerconfiguration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same systemconfiguration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SASstack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for N6210 systems. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of


the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N6210 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6210 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6210, see Appendix H, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” on page 245.



Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C10, C20 1044


2858 C10, C20 1051

5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2858 C10, C20 1055

NIC SFP+ 2858 C10, C20 2012

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2858 C10, C20 20131 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



The N6240 systems consist of the Model C21, Model E11, Model E21, andassociated software. All models can be configured, via optional features, to beeither storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include ClusteredFailover (CFO) support (via required feature), designed to provide failover andfailback function, helping improve overall availability. All N6240 models must bemounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6240 models include storage inthe base chassis.




N6240 modelsIBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers include:v Model C21 - An active/active dual-node base unitv Model E11 - A single-node base unit



v Model E21 - The coupling of two Model E11s

Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that provides additional PCIe slots.The I/O expansion is not available on Cxx models.

The Model E11 can be upgraded to a Model E21; model upgrades are disruptive.



All N6240 models feature:v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the


serving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructuresv High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical

applicationsv Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached

Storage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer SystemInterface (iSCSI)

v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and SerialAdvanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed toallow deployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, and the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansionunit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unitmust be attached to the N series system.


Attribute C21 E11 E21

Number of controllers 2 1 2

Rack space required 3U 3U 6U

Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU 2 1 2

Random access memory (GB) 16 8 16

4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 4 2 4

6-Gb SAS ports 4 2 4

Disk drives supported 600 600 600

1-Gb Ethernet ports 4 2 4

PCIe expansion slots 4 6 12

Serial console ports 2 1 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 2 1 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes




FC loops 8 13 26

FC loops (dual-path) 4 n/a 13

SAS stacks n/a 13 12

SAS stacks (dual-path) 4 n/a 13


10-Gb FCoE ports 8 8 16

EXN1000 storage expansion units 42 42 42





Connecting storage expansion units to the N6240The N6240 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansionunit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. TheEXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.



The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB and 3 TB physical capacitiesv 100 GB solid-state drive (SSD)

Note: The 100 GB solid-state drive feature requires that Data ONTAP 8.0.27-Mode, or higher, be installed on the storage controller. A maximum offour EXN3000s may be attached to any N series supported system. TheEXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-SSDstorage.


Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System


Storage N series, orders for N series expansion units may not include more thantwo types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined bythe number of disk drives supported. The N6240 models each support 600 harddrive spindles.




Maximum storageenclosures

Maximum diskdrives






42 294 588 TB


42 588 1176 TB

EXN3000 100 GB solid-statedrive (SSD)1

*Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode or higher

4 96 9.6 TB







25 300 600 TB


25 600 1200 TB

EXN3000 3 TB SATA disk drives *Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode or higher

25 600 1800 TB



EXN4000 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 42 588 176.4 TB




|

1 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) drives require at least one stack ofrotating disk drives in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSDdrives to function properly, a minimum of four SSD drives must be installed in thedisk shelf.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a singleFibre Channel loop.






Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C21, E11, E21 1044


2858 C21, E11, E21 1051

5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2858 C21, E11, E21 1055

NIC SFP+ 2858 C21, E11, E21 2012

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2858 C21, E11, E21 20131 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



The N6270 systems consist of the Model C22, Model E12, Model E22, andassociated software. All models can be configured, via optional features, to beeither storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered


||||

Failover (CFO) support (via required feature), designed to provide failover andfailback function, helping improve overall availability. All N6270 models must bemounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6270 models include storage inthe base chassis.




N6270 modelsIBM System Storage N6270 storage controllers include:v Model C22 - an active/active dual-node base unit consisting of a single chassis

with two controllers and no I/O expansion modulesv Model E12 - a single-node base unit consisting of a single chassis with one

controller and one I/O expansion modulev Model E22 - the coupling of two E12 models

Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that provides additional PCIe slots.The I/O expansion is not available on Cxx models.

The Model E12 can be upgraded to a Model E22; model upgrades are disruptive.



All N6270 models feature:v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the


serving over Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructuresv High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical

applicationsv Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for NAS via FC or

iSCSIv FC, SAS, and SATA attachment options for disk expansion units designed to

allow deployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit,and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must beattached to the N series system.





Number of controllers 2 1 2

Rack space required 3U 3U 6U

Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU 2 1 2

Random access memory (GB) 32 16 32

4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 4 2 4

6-Gb SAS ports 4 2 4

Disk drives supported 960 960 960


PCIe expansion slots 4 6 12

Serial console ports 2 1 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 2 1 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes



FC loops 8 13 26

FC loops (dual-path) 4 n/a 13

SAS stacks n/a 13 12

SAS stacks (dual-path) 4 n/a 13


10-Gb FCoE ports 8 12 24






Connecting storage expansion units to the N6270The N6270 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansionunit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. TheEXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.




The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The supported disk drives are:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacitiesv 100 GB solid-state drive (SSD)

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode, or higher, be installed onthe storage controller. A maximum of four EXN3000s may be attached toany N series supported system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be inthe same SAS stack as non-SSD storage.


Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM SystemStorage N series, orders for N series storage expansion units may not include morethan two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined bythe number of disk drives supported. The N6270 models each support 960 harddrive spindles.





Maximum diskdrives






68 480 960 TB


68 960 1920 TB



4 96 9.6 TB







|




Maximum diskdrives



40 480 960 TB


40 960 1920 TB

EXN3000 3 TB SATA disk drives *Requires DataONTAP 8.0.27-Mode or higher

40 960 2880 TB

EXN3500 450 GB SAS disk drives 40 960 432 TB






EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a singleFibre Channel loop.





||||



Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C22, E12, E22 1044


2858 C22, E12, E22 1051

5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2858 C22, E12, E22 1055

NIC SFP+ 2858 C22, E12, E22 2012

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2858 C22, E22 20131 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.


N7700 filer hardware featuresThe N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 andassociated software with gateway options.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N7000 series filer system.




N7700 A11The N7700 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7700 isa 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The basechassis includes:v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cachev 16 GB of DDR-333 memoryv 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports



v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slotsv Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)v One serial console port

For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for thestandard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storagesystems are described in Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported byN7000 series systems,” on page 255.

The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the additionof four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk drives. TheModel A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via theaddition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature number 1009).


N7700 A21The N7700 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of840 drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option), 32 GB of DDR-333 memory, andten backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storagecontroller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The Model A21 includes:v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2

cachev 32 GB of DDR-333 memoryv 1 GB of NVRAMv 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Six PCI-X expansion slotsv 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two PCIe

slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)v Two serial console ports

For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard(included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards.



The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the additionof two optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014,1029, or 1035).

The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1009).




The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by thenumber of disk drives supported.



Disk enclosure Disk drive capacity

Maximumstorage


drives







In systems runningData ONTAP 7.3.x

84 420 840 TB

In systems runningData ONTAP 8.0.x7-Mode

84 840 1680 TB



4 96 9.6 TB




|



Maximumstorage


drives







84 420 840 TB


84 840 1680 TB



84 840 2520 TB




EXN4000 andEXN2000

144 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 84 840 120.96 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 84 840 252 TB


EXN4000 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 84 840 504 TB1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported(840) and a maximum physical storage limit of 840 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2520 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher. Both limits must be honored.2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) drives require at least one stack of rotating disk drives in addition tothe SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD drives to function properly, a minimum of four SSD drives mustbe installed in the disk shelf.





|||

Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.




N7700 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N7700 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7700, see Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 255.



2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A21 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A21 1040


Copper-fiber converter 2866 A20, A21 1042

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1044

30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)1

2866 A20, A21 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 A20, A21 1050


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable3 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1053


1054


1055


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1071


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1072


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 2 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

2012

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.2 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).3 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.





Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

9201

Field install rack mount kit 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

9202


N7900 filer hardware featuresThe N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 andassociated software with gateway options.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported devices foryour N7000 series filer system.




N7900 A11The N7900 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cachev 32 GB of DDR-333 memoryv 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Three PCI-X expansion slotsv Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One

PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)



v One serial console port

For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for thestandard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card.


The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the additionof four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk drives (orLUNs, with the gateway option). The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximumof 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of two optional quad-port copperGigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009).


N7900 A21The N7900 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the ClusteredFailover (CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximumof 1176 drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option) and 14 backend Fibre Channelloops.

The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover andfailback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, eachnode is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupiesa total of 12U of rack space.

The N7900 Model A21 includes:v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of

level 2 cachev 64 GB of DDR-333 memoryv 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 portsv 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel portsv Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Six PCI-X expansion slotsv 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two PCIe

slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)v Two serial console ports

For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard(included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards.



The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop Aand loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the additionof four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 GigabitEthernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit EthernetNICs (feature number 1009).




The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by thenumber of disk drives supported.




Maximumstorage


drives





EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk drives1 84 1176 1176 TB



84 588 1176 TB


84 1176 2352 TB



4 96 9.6 TB







|



Maximumstorage


drives




84 588 1176 TB


84 1176 2352 TB



84 1176 3528 TB




EXN4000 andEXN2000


EXN4000 andEXN2000



EXN4000 600 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 84 1176 705.6 TB1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 is determined by the maximum number of disk drives supported(1176) and a maximum physical storage limit of 1176 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 3528 TB insystems running Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher. Both limits must be honored.2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) drives require at least one stack of rotating disk drives in addition tothe SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD drives to function properly, a minimum of four SSD drives mustbe installed in the disk shelf.




Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.


|||




N7900 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N7900 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7900, see Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 255.



2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A20, A21 1037



Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 A20, A21 1042

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1044

30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)1

2867 A20, A21 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 A20, A21 1050


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1053


1054


1055


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1071


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1072


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 2 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

2012

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.2 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).3 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

9201

Field install rack mount kit 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

9202




N7950T hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N7950T (2867 Model E22) system is an active/activedual-node base unit consisting of two cable-coupled chassis with one controllerand one I/O expansion module per node. It is designed to provide fast data access,simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and lowmaintenance requirements.

The N7950T can be configured as a gateway and is designed to provide:v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the

needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integratedarchitecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file serving overEthernet and FC SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response timesfor database, email, and technical applications Enterprise customer support forunified access requirements for Network Attached Storage (NAS) via FC orInternet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) FC, Serial Attached SCSI(SAS), and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) attachment optionsfor disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multipleenvironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios,and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensive operations

The N7950T supports the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FCstorage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the Nseries system

The IBM System Storage N7950T storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP, FCoE, andNFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver Systemp, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

The N7950T system consists of the Model E22 and associated software. TheN7950T can be configured, via optional features, to be either a storage controller orgateway. It includes Clustered Failover (CFO) support (via required feature),designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. The N7950T must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7950Tdoes not include storage in the base chassis.




N7950T model E22IBM N series currently offers the N7950T Model E22. The E22 model contains anI/O expansion module that provides additional PCIe slots.



Each chassis is 6U (a total of 12U for N950T Model E22), and must be mounted ina standard 19-inch rack. The N7950T storage controllers do not include storage inthe base chassis.

Note: The E22 can be configured as a gateway. If it is to be used as a gateway, allLicensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (forexample, SnapRestore - GW).

The N7950T features:v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address the


serving over Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructuresv High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technical

applicationsv Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for Network

Attached Storage (NAS) via FC or Internet Small Computer System Interface(iSCSI)

v FC, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment(SATA) attachment options for disk expansion units designed to allowdeployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

The N7950T supports the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FCstorage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the Nseries system.

Table 57. N7950T physical attributes

Attribute E22

Number of controllers 2

Rack space required 12U

Six core 2.93 GHz CPU 2 per node

Random access memory (GB) 96 per node

8-Gb Fibre Channel ports 4 per node

FC disk drives supported 1176

SAS disk drives supported 1440

10-Gb Ethernet ports 4 per node

Available PCIe expansion slots 12 per node

Serial console ports 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes

Optional adapter features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Notethat each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can beinstalled.


Attribute E22

FC loops 14

FC loops (dual-path) 14

SAS stacks (dual-path) 6

Ethernet ports 48

10-Gb FCoE ports 24

EXN1000 storage expansion units 84




Connecting storage expansion units to the N7950TThe N7950T may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but itrequires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000,EXN3000, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.


The EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. The EXN4000supports FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm),450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm).

The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of five, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA diskdrives. The EXN3000 supports the following drives:v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacitiesv SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacitiesv Solid State Disk (SSD): 100 GB (up to 96 SSDs per system)

Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s with SSDs may be attached to any Nsupported series system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in thesame SAS stack as non-SSD storage.


For the initial order of an IBM System Storage N series, you may not include EXNstorage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed andcapacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7950T systems is determined by thenumber of disk drives supported. The N7950T model supports up to 1176FC-attachment (EXN1000/4000) hard drive spindles and 1440 SAS-attachment(EXN3x00) hard drive spindles.


The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N7950T Model E22

Table 58. N7950T raw storage capacity


Maximumstorage







EXN3000 100 GB SSD (solid-state drives)1 4 96 9.6 TB











EXN4000 300 GB FC disk drives 84 1176 352.80 TB




EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share an FC loop with EXN4000FC storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units aresupported on a single FC loop. A maximum of ten storage expansion units aresupported on a single SAS stack.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7950T. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability ofthe storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N7950T feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N7950T cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7950T, see Appendix J, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems,” on page 269.


|

||||

Table 59. N7950T feature codes


Cluster 4X IB Fi Cable 5M 2867 E22 1040

Cluster 4X IB Fi Cable 30M 2867 E22 1041

Cu-Fi Converter - 4X IB Cable 2867 E22 1043

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 E22 1044


2867 E22 1051

5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2867 E22 1055

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2867 E22 2013

SFP+ Optical module for FC1078

2867 E22 2014

0.5 m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E22 2052

2.0 m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E22 2053

5.0 m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E22 20541 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



Plant install in 2101-N42 rack 2867 E22 9201

Field install rack mount kit 2867 E22 9202

The power cord features for the N7950T are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord listfor N series storage systems,” on page 191.

EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is a SATA diskstorage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. The EXN1000 3U diskstorage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack.

The EXN1000 contains:v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllersv Fourteen hard disk drive bays.

The EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of fiveSATA disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity), in250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB or 2 TB physical capacities.v With 250 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 3.5

TB of physical storage capacity.v With 320 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 4.48

TB of physical storage capacity.v With 500 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 7

TB of physical storage capacity.v With 750 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 10.5

TB of physical storage capacity.


v With 1 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 14 TBof physical storage capacity.

v With 2 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 28 TBof physical storage capacity.

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least five of the drivesmust be installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature4099) covering the remaining drive bays.

Attention: 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000swhen used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

EXN1000 feature codesTable 61 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000.

Table 61. EXN1000 feature codes


SFP GBIC 2861 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable0.5 m 1

2861 001 2020

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2861 001 2021

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable3.0 m 1

2861 001 2022

1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2042



250 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4010

320 GB SATA Drive 2 2861 001 4011

500 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4012

750 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4013

1 TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4016

2 TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4021

HDD Blank Panel 2861 001 40991 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connectionsto storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs.For more information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700CPU modules” on page 21.2 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used inN7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cordlist for N series storage systems,” on page 191.

EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a FibreChannel disk storage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. Physicalcapacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN2000 added to an N series system(assuming the EXN2000 is populated with 14 300 GB HDDs).


The EXN2000 contains:v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllersv Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum offour Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the samecapacity). Disk drive options for the EXN2000 include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drivesmust be installed in the EXN2000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature4099) covering the remaining drive bays.




SFP GBIC 2863 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable0.5 m

2863 001 20201


Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable3.0 m

2863 001 20221





2863 001 4000


2863 001 4001


2863 001 4002


2863 001 4003


2863 001 4004

HDD Blank Panel 2863 001 40991 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connectionsto storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs.For more information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700CPU modules” on page 21.



EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit provides low-costhigh-capacity Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial Advanced TechnologyAttachment (SATA) disk storage for supported IBM N series system storagesystems. For connectivity to the EXN3000 expansion disks, an available PCI-e I/Oslot in the N series controller is needed for the SAS HBA.

Note: The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is available for attachmentto all N series systems except the N3300, N3700, N5200, and N5500 systems.

The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is a 4U disk storage expansionunit. The EXN3000 contains:v Redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or fourpower supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four powersupplies and require the use of four power outlets. EXN3000s with SATAdisk drives have two power supplies and require the use of two poweroutlets.

v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllersv 24 hard disk drive slotsv Diagnostic and status LEDs

The 4U disk expansion design of the EXN3000 houses up to 24 SAS, SATA, orSolid-state (SSD) disk drives. Disk drive options for the EXN3000 include:v 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB SAS drives (15,000 RPM)v 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB SATA drives (7200 RPM)v 100 GB Solid-state drives

SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 is either a SAS storagecontroller or a SATA storage controller. The drives must be ordered as features ofthe EXN3000.

Solid-state drives (SSDs) require Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode, or higher, be installedon the storage controller. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SASstack as non-SSD storage.

For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 andEXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attachedMetroCluster systems

Note: The guides referenced here and in "Supporting FC/SAS bridgeconfigurations" below, as well as other N series documentation, are availableon the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and navigated asdescribed in “Websites” on page xxiv.

See this guide and ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operations Manual forinformation about FC/SAS bridge hardware.


|

|

||||

||

Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurationsSee Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk shelves and FibreBridge 6500N Guide forinformation on installing, hot-adding, converting HA pairs to fabric-attachedMetroClusters, and replacing FC/SAS bridge.




SAS disk power supply 2857 003 1102

2.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP Cable 2857 003 2050


0.5 m SAS QSFP-QSFP Cable 2857 003 2052



0.5 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2063

2.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2064

5.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2065

FC/SAS Bridge 2857 003 2100

300 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4015

450 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4016

600 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4017

500 GB SATA Drive 2857 003 4018

1 TB SATA Drive 2857 003 4020

2 TB SATA Drive 2857 003 4021

3 TB SATA Drive 2857 003 4022

100 GB Solid-state Drive 2857 003 4050


EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe new IBM System Storage EXN3500 expansion disk is a versatile, cost-effective,high-capacity SAS disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N seriesproducts. The EXN3500 offers a highly capable and resilient SAS technology for Nseries, available for attachment to nearly any N series model (except the N3300,N3700, N5200, and N5500) utilizing SAS connectivity.

The EXN3500 is a 2U disk expansion device designed to support up to 24 SAShard disk drives, allowing great flexibility for a wide range of customerenvironments. It may be mounted in any industry-standard 19 inch rack. TheEXN3500 contains:v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllersv 24 hard disk drive slots


||||

|

v Diagnostic and status LEDs

Disk drive options for the EXN3500 include 450 GB and 600 GB SAS drives.

For detailed information about the important differences between the EXN3500 andEXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage N seriesUniversal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide.

FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attachedMetroCluster systems

Note: The guides referenced here and in "Supporting FC/SAS bridgeconfigurations" below, as well as other N series documentation, are availableon the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and navigated asdescribed in “Websites” on page xxiv.

See this guide and ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operations Manual forinformation about FC/SAS bridge hardware.

Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurationsSee Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk shelves and FibreBridge 6500N Guide forinformation on installing, hot-adding, converting HA pairs to fabric-attachedMetroClusters, and replacing FC/SAS bridge.









0.5 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 006 2063

2.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 006 2064

5.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 006 2065

FC/SAS Bridge 2857 003 2100

450 GB SAS Drive 2857 006 4100

600 GB SAS Drive 2857 006 4101


EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a FibreChannel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series systems. Physicalcapacity can be scaled up to 8.4 TB for each EXN4000 added to an N series system(assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 600 GB HDDs).


|

|

||||

||

||||

|

The EXN4000 is designed to provide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channeldisk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000sattached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed.

Note: The EXN4000 4-Gbps support requires that the N series system be runningData ONTAP 7.2.1 or higher.

The EXN4000 contains:v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fansv Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllersv Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum offour Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the samecapacity). Disk drive options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (15,000 RPM), 300GB (10,000 RPM or 15,000 RPM), 450 GB (15,000 RPM), and 600 GB (15,000 RPM).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drivesmust be installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature4099) covering the remaining drive bays.




4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2863 004 2011






2863 004 4003


2863 004 4004


2863 004 4006


2863 004 4007


2863 004 4017

HDD Blank Panel 2863 004 4099



Rack mount requirementsN series storage systems and storage expansion units should be rack-mounted. Nseries storage systems and storage expansion units include a mounting rail kit. Therecommended racks are:v IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rackv IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rackv IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rackv IBM 2101 Model N42 rack, which is a 42U high rack

Other racks may be used, provided they allow the clearances specified inAppendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 195. N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It isimportant to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 orIBM 2101.


Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features

The operating system for the IBM N series products is the Data ONTAP software.It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system that can handleheterogeneous environments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and webenvironments.

Data ONTAP characteristics include:v Flexible volumes that do not require prepartitioningv Usage of multiple processors for performancev Block-level data access over a Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and over an

IP-based Ethernet network using iSCSIv File-level data access over an IP-based Ethernet network using file access

protocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTPv Data protection and recoveryv Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference datav Double parity RAIDv Setup wizardv FilerView™, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to

fully manage N series systems from remote locations. FilerView is a simple andintuitive web-based single-appliance administration.

v SnapShot™, which enables instant self-service file backup and recovery for endusers. Only block level changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space isrequired for each subsequent snapshot.

v FlexVol™, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible volumesacross a large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptivestorage (thin) provisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVolenables more productive use of available storage and helps improveperformance.

The following protocols are supported for IBM N series storage systems.

CIFS CIFS allows Microsoft Windows servers and clients access over the IPnetwork using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client accesslicenses (CALs) are not required.

CIFS supports an active directory environment.

To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.See “IBM N series host software features” on page 119.

NFS NFS allows UNIX and Linux servers and clients access over an IP networkusing NFS file system protocols.

To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.See “IBM N series host software features” on page 119.

iSCSI iSCSI allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/Oformats (iSCSI protocol) across an IP network. iSCSI enables the creation ofIP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP environments.

To enable iSCSI, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See “IBMN series host software features” on page 119.


FCP FCP allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/Oformats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enablesparticipation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SANenvironments.

To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See “IBMN series host software features” on page 119.

Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packagesavailable for N series storage systems as feature codes.

Advanced Single Instance StorageThis feature provides block-level deduplication within the entire flexiblevolume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-lineFunction feature enabled. Advanced Single Instance Storage only storesunique data blocks in the flexible volume and creates a small amount ofadditional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital"signature," that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible volume.If an exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible volume, theduplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed.

CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designedto enable the transfer of data service from an unavailable controller to theother controller in the cluster. It is designed to deliver a robust and highlyavailable data service for business-critical environments.

Disk SanitizationDisk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data byoverwriting disks with specified byte patterns or random data in a mannerthat helps prevent recovery of current data by any known recoverymethods. This feature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by usingthree successive byte-overwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cyclesper operation.

Note: After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N seriesstorage system, it cannot be uninstalled.

FlexCache™ for NFSFlexCache for NFS is designed to create a caching layer in your storageinfrastructure that helps to eliminate performance bottlenecks in NFSenvironments. It is designed to replicate hot data sets to local cachingvolumes anywhere in the infrastructure. This is useful with NFSimplementations in compute-intensive applications, distributed computingenvironments, and reverse-tiered storage.

FlexClone™

FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data volumes/sets withoutrequiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allowsan IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modifyand run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting theonline database and without taking the online database offline.

MetroClusterThis feature is an integrated, high-availability, and business-continuancesolution designed to leverage proven technologies from IBM. It expandsthe capabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-availability anddisaster recovery solutions–a portfolio that includes failover, datareplication, and backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be asimple-to-administer solution that extends failover capability from within a


data center to a remote site. It also provides replication of data at theprimary site to a remote site, helping to keep data at the remote sitecurrent. The combination of failover and data replication aids in therecovery from disaster, helping prevent loss of data in less time thanotherwise possible.

MultiStore®

MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIXfile servers onto a single storage system.

MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, privatelogical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each virtualstorage partition is designed to maintain separation from every otherstorage partition to prevent different enterprise departments that share thesame storage resources from accessing or finding other partitions.MultiStore helps prevent information on any virtual partition from beingviewed, used, or downloaded by an unauthorized users.

NearStoreThis feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for dataprotection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrentstreams and SnapVault for NetBackup.

SnapLock ComplianceSnapLock Compliance provides data permanence storage that enablescompliance with government records retention regulations by usingSEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology.

SnapLock EnterpriseLike SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise provides datapermanence storage that enables compliance with government recordsretention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORMtechnology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLockEnterprise volumes.

SnapManager™ for ExchangeSnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storagemanagement while simplifying configuration, backup, and restoreoperations for Microsoft Exchange databases.

SnapManager for Hyper-VSnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with theMicrosoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity ofany number of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller.

SnapManager for OracleSnapManager for Oracle is designed to integrate with an Oracle Databaseand automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, database recovery, andcloning.

SnapManager for SAPSnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backupand restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integratedwith the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recovery of SAPsystems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designedto simplify provisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems.

SnapManager for SharePointIBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint provides a singleconsole to manage disk-based backup and recovery of SharePoint content

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 105

databases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and versions ofdocuments. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system,SnapManager software is designed to provide near-instantaneous hotbackups and rapid restores to help you achieve a combination ofavailability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePointenvironments. This feature allows connectivity of any number of MicrosoftOffice SharePoint servers to one N series storage system.

SnapManager for SQLSnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore timesof SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databasesusing minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for VISnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed tointegrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity ofany number of VMWare servers to one storage controller.

SnapMirror®

SnapMirror provides remote mirroring software that enables automated filesystem replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous,synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication over inexpensiveInternet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates.

SnapMover®

SnapMover provides a local data migration solution for optimizingworkloads across N series systems sharing a common disk array.SnapMover allows you to migrate the ownership of a volume from onefiler to another filer with a single command. This feature also allows forbetter resource utilization and performance amongst multiple N seriessystems.

Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMover.

SnapRestore®

SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and volumes.It provides instant self-service volume recovery for large individual files.SnapRestore allows volumes to be restored with a single command (asopposed to the file level restorations that SnapShot offers).

SnapValidator™

SnapValidator provides data validation and protection for Oracle data.

SnapVault PrimarySnapVault Primary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing upa SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault provides heterogeneous,super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration byperiodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVaultPrimary is the license for the primary backup system in use.

SnapVault SecondaryLike SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary provides disk-based backupby periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVaultSecondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup device.

SyncMirror®

SyncMirror provides data protection by maintaining two copies of dataonline; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the two


copies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one volumeto another volume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes volumemirroring between two clustered nodes.

Software packsSoftware packs are designed to provide simplified ordering of commoncombinations of software features.

Note: For more information about N series software licenses, refer to the N seriessupport website, which is accessed as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

Table 66 lists the software packs available for the N3300, N3400, N3600, N6040,N6060 and N6070 systems.

Table 66. N series software packs

BundleSupportedsystems

Storage system-basedfeatures Host server-based features

Base pack

This softwarepack provides thebasic softwarefunctions for Nseries systems.

N3300,N3400,N3600,N6040,N6060, N6070

v iSCSI

v FCP

v HTTP

v SyncMirror

v NearStore

v A-SIS Deduplication

v Operations Manager (one node)

Foundation pack

This softwarepack provides thefoundation forexpanded use ofthe N seriessystem.

N3300,N3400, N3600

v SnapRestore

v SnapVault Primary

v Provisioning Manager (one node)

Protection pack

This softwarepack provides theexpandedprotectionsoftwarecapabilities of theN series system.

N3300,N3400, orN3600

v SnapMirror

v SnapVault Secondary

v Protection Manager (one node)

Advanced pack

This softwarepack provides thebasis for theadvancedfunctions of the Nseries system.

N3300,N3400, orN3600

v FlexClone

v MultiStore

v SnapLock Compliance

v SnapLock Enterprise

None


Table 66. N series software packs (continued)



Application pack

This softwarepack provides thebasis for theapplicationfunctions of the Nseries system.

N3400 None v SnapManager for Exchange1

v SnapManager for SQL1

v SnapManager for SAP1

v SnapManager for Oracle1

v SnapManager for Hyper-V1

v SnapManager for VI1

v SnapManager for SharePoint1

v SnapDrive for UNIX1

v SnapDrive for Windows1

v Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (enables 25Windows systems for single-node systems, 50 fordual-node systems).4

v Single Mailbox Recovery Windows (1500mailboxes for single-node systems, 3000 mailboxesfor dual-node systems)5

Server pack

This softwarepack provides thebasis for theserver functions ofthe N seriessystem.

N3400 None v SnapManager for VI1



v Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO 4

1 This software pack includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N seriesstorage system; it allows any number of host servers that install this software to use these functions with the storagesystem that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for yourstorage system in “IBM N series controller software feature codes” on page 111.4 This software pack includes a license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host server where thesoftware offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with a maximum number of Windows host serversdepending on the storage system model used. To license additional storage systems, see the definition and tableentries for this offering in “IBM N series host software features” on page 119.5 This software pack includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host server to specifythe maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additionalmailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in “IBM N series host softwarefeatures” on page 119.

Software bundlesSoftware bundles are designed to provide simplified ordering of commoncombinations of software features.

Note: For more information about N series software licenses, refer to the N seriessupport website, which is accessed as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

The following tables describe the available N series software bundles:v Table 67 on page 109v Table 68 on page 110


Table 67. N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 software bundles



Windows bundle

This softwarebundle provides theexpandedcapabilities of the Nseries storagesystem in aWindowsenvironment.

N3300, N3400,N3600, andN6040

v CIFS

v SnapRestore

v SnapVault Primary


v SnapMirror

v SnapManager for Exchange1









v Protection Manager2

v Provisioning Manager3

v Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO4

v Single Mailbox Recovery5

Virtualizationbundle

This softwarebundle provides theexpandedvirtualizationsoftware capabilitiesof the N seriessystem.

N3300, N3400,N3600, andN6040

v NFS

v SnapRestore

v SnapVault Primary


v SnapMirror








Complete bundle

This softwarebundle provides thebasis for theadvanced functionsof the N seriessystem.

N3300, N3400,N3600, andN6040

v NFS

v CIFS

v SnapRestore

v SnapVault Primary


v SnapMirror

v FlexClone

v MultiStore

















Table 67. N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 software bundles (continued)



1 This Software Bundle includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N seriesstorage system; it allows any number of host servers that install this software to use these functions with the storagesystem that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for yourstorage system in “IBM N series controller software feature codes” on page 111.2 This Software Bundle includes one license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host serverwhere the software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with a single storage system. To licenseadditional storage systems, see the definition and table entries for this offering in “IBM N series host softwarefeatures” on page 119.3 This Software Bundle includes one tier x license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host serverwhere the software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with the tier's maximum number ofstorage systems. To license additional tiers of storage systems, see the definition and table entries for this offering in“IBM N series host software features” on page 119.4 This Software Bundle includes a license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host server wherethe software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with a maximum number of Windows hostservers depending on the storage system model used. To license additional storage systems, see the definition andtable entries for this offering in “IBM N series host software features” on page 119.5 This Software Bundle includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host server tospecify the maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additionalmailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in “IBM N series host softwarefeatures” on page 119.

Table 68. N6200 series and N7x50T series software bundles

Bundle Supported systemsStorage system-basedfeatures Host server-based features

Data ONTAPEssentials

This softwarebundle providesthe essential DataONTAP functionsthat must beordered with the Nseries storagesystem.

N6210, N6240,N6270, N7950T

v Clustered Failover(CFO)

v SyncMirror

v ASIS (Deduplication)

v FlexCache for NFS

v Disk Sanitization

v MultiStore

v NearStore

v HTTP

v Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (25licenses per controller)

v Open Systems SnapVault (OSSV) Windows1

v OSSV Linux1

v OSSV UNIX1

v OSSV VMware1


v Protection Manager DR3

v Operations Manager3


SnapManager Suitebundle

This softwarebundle providesthe automatedbackup and restorefunctions for a setof specific hostapplications usedwith the N seriesstorage system.

N6210, N6240,N6270, N7950T

None v SnapManager for Exchange1










Table 68. N6200 series and N7x50T series software bundles (continued)

Bundle Supported systemsStorage system-basedfeatures Host server-based features

Complete bundle

This softwarebundle providesthe full range ofadvanced storagefunctions of the Nseries system.

N6210, N6240,N6270, N7950T

v NFS

v CIFS

v FCP

v iSCSI

v SnapVault

v SnapRestore

v SnapMirror

v FlexClone













1 This Software Bundle includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N seriesstorage system; it allows any number of host servers that install this software to use these functions with the storagesystem that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for yourstorage system in “IBM N series controller software feature codes.”3 This Software Bundle includes one tier x license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host serverwhere the software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with the tier's maximum number ofstorage systems. To license additional tiers of storage systems, see the definition and table entries for this offering in“IBM N series host software features” on page 119.5 This Software Bundle includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host server tospecify the maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additionalmailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in “IBM N series host softwarefeatures” on page 119.

IBM N series controller software feature codesTable 69, Table 70 on page 113, Table 71 on page 115, Table 72 on page 116, Table 73on page 117, and Table 74 on page 118 list the supported software features for all Nseries models.

Table 69. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210, N6240, N6270 (Model 2858) and N7950T (Model2867)

Description

N62102858C10

N62102858C20

N62402858 C21

N62402858 E11

N62402858 E21

N62702858C22

N62702858 E12

N62702858 E22

N7950T2867 E22

Data ONTAPEssentials

5750 5700 5600 5650 5600 5800 5850 5800 5900

Data ONTAPEssentials - GW

5775 5725 5625 5675 5625 5825 5875 5825 5925

CIFS initial 5751 5701 5601 5651 5601 5801 5851 5801 5901

CIFS initial - GW 5776 5726 5626 5676 5626 5826 5876 5826 5926

CIFS secondary 5752 5702 5602 5652 5602 5802 5852 5802 5902

CIFS secondary - GW 5777 5727 5627 5677 5627 5827 5877 5827 5927

FCP initial 5753 5703 5603 5653 5603 5803 5853 5803 5903

FCP initial - GW 5778 5728 5628 5678 5628 5828 5878 5828 5928

FCP secondary 5754 5704 5604 5654 5604 5804 5854 5804 5904

FCP secondary - GW 5779 5729 5629 5679 5629 5829 5879 5829 5929

iSCSI initial 5755 5705 5605 5655 5605 5805 5855 5805 5905


Table 69. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210, N6240, N6270 (Model 2858) and N7950T (Model2867) (continued)

Description

N62102858C10

N62102858C20

N62402858 C21

N62402858 E11

N62402858 E21

N62702858C22

N62702858 E12

N62702858 E22

N7950T2867 E22

iSCSI initial - GW 5780 5730 5630 5680 5630 5830 5880 5830 5930

iSCSI secondary 5756 5706 5606 5656 5606 5806 5856 5806 5906

iSCSI secondary - GW 5781 5731 5631 5681 5631 5831 5881 5831 5931

NFS initial 5757 5707 5607 5657 5607 5807 5857 5807 5907

NFS initial - GW 5782 5732 5632 5682 5632 5832 5882 5832 5932

NFS secondary 5758 5708 5608 5658 5608 5808 5858 5808 5930

NFS secondary - GW 5783 5733 5633 5683 5633 5833 5883 5833 5933

SnapLock Compliance 5759 5709 5609 5659 5609 5809 5859 5809 n/a

SnapLock Compliance- GW

5784 5734 5634 5684 5634 5834 5884 5834 n/a

SnapLock Enterprise 5769 5719 5619 5669 5619 5819 5869 5819 n/a

SnapLock Enterprise -GW

5794 5744 5644 5694 5644 5844 5894 5844 n/a

Data ONTAP 5760 5710 5610 5660 5610 5810 5860 5810 5910

Data ONTAP - GW 5785 5735 5635 5685 5635 5835 5885 5835 5935

SnapRestore 5761 5711 5611 5661 5611 5811 5861 5811 5911

SnapRestore - GW 5786 5736 5636 5686 5636 5836 5886 5836 5936

SnapMirror 5762 5712 5612 5662 5612 5812 5862 5812 5912

SnapMirror - GW 5787 5737 5637 5687 5637 5837 5887 5837 5937

SnapVault 5763 5713 5613 5663 5613 5813 5863 5813 5913

SnapVault - GW 5788 5738 5638 5688 5638 5838 5888 5838 5938

FlexClone 5764 5714 5614 5664 5614 5814 5864 5814 5914

FlexClone - GW 5789 5739 5639 5689 5639 5839 5889 5839 5939

SnapManager Suite 5765 5715 5615 5665 5615 5815 5865 5815 5915

SnapManager Suite -GW

5790 5740 5640 5690 5640 5840 5890 5840 5940

Complete Bundle 5766 5716 5616 5666 5616 5816 5866 5816 5916

Complete Bundle -GW

5791 5741 5641 5691 5641 5841 5891 5841 5941

MetroCluster N/A 5717 N/A N/A 5617 N/A N/A 5817 5917

MetroCluster - GW N/A 5742 N/A N/A 5642 N/A N/A 5842 5942

PerformanceAcceleration Module II(Flash Cache)

5768 5718 5618 5668 5618 5818 5868 5818 n/a

PerformanceAcceleration Module II(Flash Cache) - GW

5793 5743 5643 5693 5643 5843 5893 5843 n/a

Flash Cache II 5770 5720 5620 5670 5620 5820 5870 5820 5920

Flash Cache II - GW 5795 5745 5645 5695 5645 5845 5895 5845 5945


Table 70. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858)

Description 2858 A10 2858 A20 2858 A11 2858 A21 2858 A12 2858 A22

Base Pack 5301 5351 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Windows Bundle 5302 5352 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Virtualization Bundle 5303 5353 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Complete Bundle 5304 5354 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Data ONTAP 6800 6850 6101 6201 6500 6550

Data ONTAP - GW 6900 6950 6301 6401 6600 6650

Data ONTAP 6800 6850 6101 6201 6500 6550

Data ONTAP - GW 6900 6950 6301 6401 6600 6650

CIFS 6801 7451 7401 6051 6501 6551

CIFS - GW 6901 7551 7501 6151 6601 6651

HTTP 6802 7452 7402 6052 6502 6552

HTTP - GW 6902 7552 7502 6152 6602 6652

NFS 6803 7453 7403 6053 6503 6553

NFS - GW 6903 7553 7503 6153 6603 6653

CFO n/a 7454 n/a 6054 n/a 6554

CFO - GW n/a 7554 n/a 6154 n/a 6654

CFO for MetroCluster 6804 n/a 7421 n/a 6504 n/a

CFO for MetroCluster - GW 6904 n/a 7521 n/a 6604 n/a

FlexClone 6805 7455 7404 6055 6505 6555

FlexClone - GW 6905 7555 7504 6155 6605 6655

MultiStore 6806 7456 7405 6056 6506 6556

MultiStore - GW 6906 7556 7505 6156 6606 6656

SnapMirror 6807 7457 7406 6057 6507 6557

SnapMirror - GW 6907 7557 7506 6157 6607 6657

SnapLock Compliance 6808 7458 7407 6058 6508 6558

SnapLock Compliance - GW 6908 7558 7520 6158 6608 6658

SnapLock Enterprise 6809 7459 7408 6059 6509 6559

SnapLock Enterprise - GW 6909 7559 7507 6159 6609 6659

SnapMover n/a 7460 n/a 6060 n/a 6560

SnapMover - GW 6910 7560 7508 6160 n/a 6660

SnapRestore 6811 7461 7409 6061 6511 6561

SnapRestore - GW 6911 7561 7509 6161 6611 6661

SnapVault Primary 6812 7462 7410 6062 6512 6562

SnapVault Primary - GW 6912 7562 7510 6162 6612 6662

SnapVault Secondary 6813 7463 7411 6063 6513 6563

SnapVault Secondary - GW 6913 7563 7511 6163 6613 6663

SyncMirror 6816 7466 7414 6066 6516 6566

SyncMirror - GW 6916 7566 7514 6166 6616 6666

FlexScale 6817 7467 7415 6076 6517 6567

FlexScale - GW 6917 7567 7515 6176 6617 6667


Table 70. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued)


SnapValidator 6818 7468 7416 6067 6518 6568

SnapValidator - GW 6918 7568 7516 6167 6618 6668

Fibre Channel Protocol 6819 7469 7417 6068 6519 6569

Fibre Channel Protocol - GW 6919 7569 7517 6168 6619 6669

Disk Sanitization 6820 7470 7418 6069 6520 6570

Disk Sanitization - GW 6920 7580 7530 6169 6620 6670

SnapManager for Exchange 6821 7471 7419 6070 6521 6571

SnapManager for Exchange -GW

6921 7570 7518 6170 6621 6671

SnapManager for SQL 6822 7472 7420 6071 6522 6572

SnapManager for SQL - GW 6922 7571 7519 6171 6622 6672

MetroCluster 6823 7473 7431 6073 6524 6576

MetroCluster - GW 6923 7573 7523 6173 6624 6674

SAN Bundle n/a 7474 n/a 6074 n/a 6574

iSCSI Protocol 6825 7475 7425 6075 6525 6575

iSCSI Protocol - GW 6925 7575 7525 6175 6625 6675

MS Exchange Bundle (5000users)

n/a n/a n/a 6078 n/a n/a

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 6829 7479 7429 6079 6529 6579

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle -GW

6929 7579 7529 6179 6629 6679

NearStore 6831 7481 7430 6072 6523 6573

NearStore - GW 6931 7572 7522 6172 6623 6673

Deduplication 6832 7482 7432 6082 6532 6582

Deduplication - GW 6932 7574 7524 6182 6632 6682

Performance AcceleratorModule II

6833 7483 7422 6077 6533 6583

Performance AcceleratorModule II - GW

6933 7583 7526 6177 6633 6683

SnapManager for SAP 6838 7488 7438 6088 6538 6588

SnapManager for SAP - GW 6938 7588 7538 6188 6638 6688

SnapManager for Oracle 6839 7489 7439 6089 6539 6589

SnapManager for Oracle - GW 6939 7589 7539 6189 6639 6689

Flash Cache II 6840 7490 7440 6090 6540 6590

Flash Cache II - GW 6940 7590 7540 6190 6640 6690

SnapManager for Hyper-V -Filer

6841 7491 7441 6091 6541 6591

SnapManager for Hyper-V -GW

6941 7591 7541 6191 6641 6691

FlexCache for NFS 6847 7497 7447 6080 6547 6597

FlexCache for NFS - GW 6947 7597 7547 6180 6647 6697

SnapManager for VI 6848 7498 7448 6098 6548 6598


Table 70. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued)


SnapManager for VI - GW 6948 7598 7548 6198 6648 6698

SnapManager for SharePoint 6849 7499 7449 6099 6549 6599

SnapManager for SharePoint -GW

6949 7599 7549 6199 6649 6699

Table 71. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to 2863)

Description 2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A10 2862 A20 2863 A10 2863 A20

Base Pack 5001 5051 5201 5251 5101 5151 n/a n/a

Foundation Pack 5002 5052 5202 5252 5102 5152 n/a n/a

Protection Pack 5003 5053 5203 5253 5103 5153 n/a n/a

Advanced Pack 5004 5054 5204 5254 5104 5154 n/a n/a

Windows Bundle 5020 5070 5220 5270 n/a 5170 n/a n/a

Virtualization Bundle 5021 5071 5221 5271 n/a 5171 n/a n/a

Complete Bundle 5022 5072 5222 5272 n/a 5172 n/a n/a

Application Pack n/a n/a 5223 5273 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Server Pack n/a n/a 5224 5274 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Data ONTAP 6300 6350 6700 6750 7001 7101 7000 7100

CIFS 6302 6352 6002 6102 7002 7102 7002 7102

HTTP 6303 6353 7003 7103 7003 7103 7003 7103

NFS 6304 6354 6004 6104 7004 7104 7004 7104

CFO n/a 6355 n/a 6105 n/a 7105 n/a 7105

SyncMirror 6306 6356 7006 7106 7006 7106 n/a n/a

SnapManager forHyper-V

6307 6357 7050 7150 7050 7150 7050 7150

FlexClone 6311 6361 7011 7111 7011 7111 7011 7111

MultiStore 6320 6370 7020 7120 7020 7120 7020 7120

NearStore 6322 6372 7022 7122 7022 7122 n/a n/a

iSCSI Protocol 6325 6375 7025 7125 7025 7125 7025 7125

SnapMirror/SnapVaultBundle

6329 6379 7029 7129 7029 7129 7029 7129

FlexCache for NFS 6330 6380 7030 7130 7030 7130 n/a n/a

SnapMirror 6331 6381 7031 7131 7031 7131 7031 7131

SnapLock Compliance 63321 63821 7032 7132 70321 71321 70321 71321

SnapLock Enterprise 63331 63831 7033 7133 70331 71331 70331 71331

SnapMover n/a 6384 n/a 7134 n/a 7134 n/a 7134

SnapRestore 6335 6385 7035 7135 7035 7135 7035 7135

SnapVault Primary 6336 6386 7036 7136 7036 7136 7036 7136

SnapVault Secondary 6337 6387 7037 7137 7037 7137 7037 7137

SnapManager for SAP 6338 6388 7038 7138 7038 7138 7038 7138

SnapManager for Oracle 6339 6389 7039 7139 7039 7139 7039 7139

SnapValidator 6342 6392 6042 6142 7042 7142 7042 7142


Table 71. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to2863) (continued)

Description 2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A10 2862 A20 2863 A10 2863 A20

Fibre Channel Protocol 6343 6393 7043 7143 7043 7143 7043 7143

Disk Sanitization 6344 6394 7044 7144 7044 7144 7044 7144

SnapManager forExchange

6345 6395 7045 7145 7045 7145 7045 7145

SnapManager for SQL 6346 6396 7046 7146 7046 7146 7046 7146

Advanced Single InstanceStorage

6347 6397 7047 7147 7047 7147 n/a n/a

SnapManager for VI 6348 6398 7048 7148 7048 7148 7048 7148

SnapManager forSharePoint

6349 6399 7049 7149 7049 7149 7049 7149

SnapDrive for UNIX n/a n/a 7076 7176 7076 7176 n/a n/a

SnapDrive for Windows n/a n/a 7077 7177 7077 7177 n/a n/a

Microsoft ExchangeBundle (2500 users)

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7178 n/a n/a

1 SnapLock Compliance and SnapLock Enterprise require Data ONTAP 7.2.5 or higher.

Table 72. N series software licensed function indicators for N5200 and N5500 (Models 2864 to 2865)

Description 2864 A10 2864 A202864G10 2864 G20 2865 A10 2865 A20

2865G10 2865 G20

Data ONTAP 7200 7250 7300 7350 7400 7450 7500 7550

CIFS 7201 7251 7301 7351 7401 7451 7501 7551

HTTP 7202 7252 7302 7352 7402 7452 7502 7552

NFS 7203 7253 7303 7353 7403 7453 7503 7553

CFO n/a 7254 n/a 7354 n/a 7454 n/a 7554

FlexClone 7204 7255 7304 7355 7404 7455 7504 7555

MultiStore 7205 7256 7305 7356 7405 7456 7505 7556

SnapMirror 7206 7257 7306 7357 7406 7457 7506 7557

SnapLock Compliance 7207 7258 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a


SnapMover n/a 7260 7308 7360 n/a 7460 7508 7560

SnapRestore 7209 7261 7309 7361 7409 7461 7509 7561



SyncMirror 7214 7266 7314 7366 7414 7466 7514 7566

SnapValidator 7216 7268 7316 7368 7416 7468 7516 7568



SnapManager for Exchange 7219 7271 7318 7370 7419 7471 7518 7570


NearStore 7230 7281 7322 7372 7430 7481 7522 7572

MetroCluster n/a 7273 n/a 7373 n/a 7473 n/a 7573


Table 72. N series software licensed function indicators for N5200 and N5500 (Models 2864 to 2865) (continued)

Description 2864 A10 2864 A202864G10 2864 G20 2865 A10 2865 A20

2865G10 2865 G20

SAN Bundle n/a 7274 n/a n/a n/a 7474 n/a n/a

iSCSI Protocol 7225 7275 7325 7375 7425 7475 7525 7575


7229 7279 7329 7379 7429 7479 7529 7579


7232 7282 73241 73741 7432 7482 75241 75741




SnapManager for Hyper-V 7241 7291 7341 7391 7441 7491 7541 7591


7249 7299 7349 7399 7449 7499 7549 7599

1 Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.2 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.

Table 73. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867)

Description2866

A10/A112866

A20/A212866 GWA10/A11

2866 GWA20/A21

2867A10/A11

2867A20/A21

2867 GWA10/A11

2867 GWA20/A21

Data ONTAP 7600 7650 7700 7750 7800 7850 7900 7950

CIFS 7601 7651 7701 7751 7801 7851 7901 7951

HTTP 7602 7652 7702 7752 7802 7852 7902 7952

NFS 7603 7653 7703 7753 7803 7853 7903 7953

CFO n/a 7654 n/a 7754 n/a 7854 n/a 7954

FlexClone 7605 7655 7705 7755 7805 7855 7905 7955

MultiStore 7606 7656 7706 7756 7806 7856 7906 7956

SnapMirror 7607 7657 7707 7757 7807 7857 7907 7957

SnapLock Compliance 7608 7658 7708 7758 7808 7858 7908 7958


SnapMover n/a 7660 7710 7760 n/a 7860 7910 7960

SnapRestore 7611 7661 7711 7761 7811 7861 7911 7961



SyncMirror 7616 7666 7716 7766 7816 7866 7916 7966

SnapValidator 7617 7667 7717 7767 7817 7867 7917 7967


Disk Sanitization 7619 7669 7719 1 7779 1 7819 7869 7919 1 7979 1



NearStore 7622 7672 7722 7772 7822 7872 7922 7972




Table 73. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to2867) (continued)

Description2866

A10/A112866

A20/A212866 GWA10/A11

2866 GWA20/A21

2867A10/A11

2867A20/A21

2867 GWA10/A11

2867 GWA20/A21

iSCSI Protocol 7625 7675 7725 7775 7825 7875 7925 7975

FlexScale 7626 7676 7726 7776 7826 7876 7926 7976


7627(A11only)

7677(A21only)

7727(A11only)

7777(A21only)

7827 7877 7927 7977

Performance AcceleratorModule II bundle

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7878 n/a 7978

Microsoft Exchange Bundle(10000 users)

n/a 7678 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


7629 7679 7729 7779 7829 7879 7929 7979

FlexCache for NFS 7630 7680 7730 7780 7830 7680 7930 7980


7632 7682 7732 7782 7832 7882 7932 7982






7649 7699 7749 7799 7849 7899 7949 7999

1 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.

Table 74. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869)

Description 2868 A10 2868 A20 2868 G10 2868 G20 2869 A10 2869 A20 2869 G10 2869 G20

Data ONTAP 6000 6050 6100 6150 6400 6450 6200 6250

CIFS 7601 6051 7701 6151 7401 7451 7501 7551

HTTP 7602 6052 7702 6152 7402 7452 7502 7552

NFS 7603 6053 7703 6153 7403 7453 7503 7553

CFO n/a 6054 n/a 6154 n/a 7454 n/a 7554

FlexClone 7605 6055 7705 6155 7404 7455 7504 7555

MultiStore 7606 6056 7706 6156 7405 7456 7505 7556

SnapMirror 7607 6057 7707 6157 7406 7457 7506 7557

SnapLock Compliance 7608 6058 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a


SnapMover n/a 6060 7710 6160 n/a 7460 7508 7560

SnapRestore 7611 6061 7711 6161 7409 7461 7509 7561



SyncMirror 7616 6066 7716 6166 7414 7466 7514 7566

SnapValidator 7617 6067 7717 6167 7416 7468 7516 7568



Table 74. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869) (continued)

Description 2868 A10 2868 A20 2868 G10 2868 G20 2869 A10 2869 A20 2869 G10 2869 G20




NearStore 7622 6072 7722 6172 7430 7481 7522 7572



iSCSI Protocol 7625 6075 7725 6175 7425 7475 7525 7575

FlexScale 7626 6076 7726 6176 7415 7467 7515 7567

Microsoft Exchange Bundle(5000 users)

n/a 6078 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


7629 6079 7729 6179 7429 7479 7529 7579

FlexCache for NFS 7630 6080 7730 6180 7447 7497 7547 7597


7632 6082 77321 61821 7432 7482 75241 75741


7633 6083 7733 6183 n/a n/a n/a n/a






7649 6099 7749 6199 7449 7499 7549 7599

1 Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.2 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.

IBM N series host software featuresThis section describes the host software features available for your N series storagesystem. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports yourN series storage system.

Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIOThe Data ONTAP Device Specific Module (DSM) for Windows MultipathI/O (MPIO) supports Windows Server host machines running SnapDrivefor Windows attached to N series storage systems that are licensed to usethe DSM with Fibre Channel (FC) and iSCSI paths.

Open Systems SnapVault AgentsOpen Systems SnapVault is designed to be a heterogeneous, disk-to-diskdata protection solution. An OSSV primary system corresponds to abackup client in the traditional backup architecture. The SnapVaultsecondary system is always an N series system running Data ONTAP.OSSV software is designed to protect data residing on the primary system,which can be a storage system attached to a server running an operatingsystem such as AIX, Windows, VMWare or Linux.

Three main components are installed within the OSSV environment:


v The primary systemv The OSSV agent residing on the primary systemv The secondary system (N series) with the SnapVault Secondary feature

A predetermined directory or file system is chosen to be backed up to thesecondary storage. The data set is mapped to a secondary system qtree ona secondary storage system.

Operation Manager Core (OMC)The OMC features are designed to provide a central point of control and toprovide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed tohelp manage storage and content delivery infrastructure, consistent withbusiness requirements, and help maximize availability and reduce totalcost of ownership.

Protection ManagerThe Protection Manager feature provides backup and replicationmanagement software for an N series disk-based data protectionenvironment. It is designed to help protect data and support highproductivity by providing policy-based management, including when usedin automated data protection configurations.

Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) featuresThe Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) features provide backupand replication management software for an N series disk-based dataprotection environment and disaster recovery. Protection Manager DR isdesigned to help protect data and support high productivity by providingpolicy-based management, including when used in automateddata-protection environments.

Provisioning ManagerProvisioning Manager is an automated, policy-based provisioning softwarefor N series environments. The software is designed to automate manualand repetitive provisioning processes, increasing the productivity ofadministrators and improving the availability of data by ensuring thatprovisioned storage complies with data protection policies.

Single Mailbox RecoverySingle Mailbox Recovery (SMBR) adds advanced function to theSnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recovery restoresindividual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot.This helps allow rapid search of archived snapshot copies of previouslydeleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single MailboxRecovery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITASBackup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCserve,Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards aredesigned to restore both private and public exchange information andstored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine,volume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recoveryserver.

SMBR Administrative ServerSMBR Administrative Server provides a framework that can hostcentralized services for multiple clients and provide both client and serversupport for Single Mailbox Recovery 5.0, or higher and Single MailboxRecovery ExtractWizard users. It facilitates server configuration, mailboxpermissions, and application auditing services for SMBR environments.


SMBR Content Analysis WizardThe SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you toautomate and save search results with Microsoft Exchange by selectingsources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, individualmailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources isallowed.

SnapDrive™

SnapDrive provides a software application designed to enhance the storagemanagement capabilities in an operating system environment, includingeasier management of dynamic volume, cluster, snapshot, and replicationmanagement.

SnapManager for ExchangeSnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storagemanagement while simplifying configuration, backup, and restoreoperations for Microsoft Exchange databases.

SnapManager for Hyper VSnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with theMicrosoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity ofany number of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller.

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint ArchiverThis feature is used with Microsoft SharePoint and SnapManagerSharepoint (SMSP) environments to migrate binary large object data(BLOB) into a CIFS share, accessible outside of the SharePoint datastructure. This method of externalizing data helps improve scalability ofthe SharePoint environment while providing access to the data. These CIFSshares can reside on primary (FC/SAS) storage or on secondary storage(SATA), allowing the core SharePoint data and the externalized data to bestored on a single system.

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint MigratorThis feature adds the ability to use SMSP functions to migrate data fromexisting CIFS shares and Exchange public folders to the SharePoint datastructure to take advantage of collaboration security provided bySharePoint. Data contained in existing CIFS shares that require increasedsecurity for collaboration can be migrated directly to the SharePointenvironment. Similarly, the data in Exchange public folders can bemigrated to the SharePoint environment while keeping in place all theexisting access security components.

SnapManager for SQLSnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore timesof SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databasesusing minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for OracleSnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host server to astorage controller.

SnapManager for Oracle for WindowsSnapManager for Oracle for Windows is designed to integrate with anOracle database and automate crucial tasks such as backup, restore,database recovery, and cloning. This feature allows connection of oneOracle host server to a storage controller. One of this feature is required for


each Oracle host. SnapManager for Oracle for Windows is available forOracle databases running on Windows.

SnapManager for VIIBM SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) isdesigned to integrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automatecrucial tasks such as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning in a VMWareenvironment.

Table 75. IBM N series host software

Description Feature

SnapDrive for UNIX - AIX 8024

SnapDrive for UNIX - Solaris 8025

SnapDrive for UNIX - HP-UX 8026

SnapDrive for UNIX - Linux 8027

SnapDrive for Windows 8050

ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO 8052

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Windows 8100

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - AIX® 8110

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Linux 8120

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - HP-UX 8121

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Solaris 8122

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - VMWare 8123

SnapManager for Oracle - Windows 8129

SnapManager for Exchange - Host 8131

SnapManager for VI - Host 8133

SnapManager for Hyper V - Host 8135

SnapManager for SAP - Windows 8140

SnapManager for SQL - Host 8141

SnapManager for Oracle 8143

SnapManager for SAP 8145

SnapManager for SharePoint 8147

SnapManager for SharePoint Management Bundle 8149

Single Mailbox Recovery 100 mailboxes 8150





Single Mailbox Recovery 10 000 mailboxes 8155

Single Mailbox Recovery 50 000 mailboxes 8156

Single Mailbox Recovery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard 8158

Single Mailbox Recovery Tivoli® Tape Extract Wizard 8159

Single Mailbox Recovery Legato Tape Extract Wizard 8160

Single Mailbox Recovery NetBackup Extract Wizard 8161

Single Mailbox Recovery PST Tape Extract Wizard 8162


Table 75. IBM N series host software (continued)

Description Feature

Single Mailbox Recovery HP Extract Wizard 8163

Single Mailbox Recovery Commvault Galaxy Ex Wizard 8164

Single Mailbox Recovery UltraBac Extract Wizard 8165

Single Mailbox Recovery Agent for Advanced Search 8166

Single Mailbox Recovery Content Analysis Wizard 8167

Single Mailbox Recovery Administrative Server 8168

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 100(host)

8181


8182


8183


8184


8185

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archiver (host) 8186

OSSV Windows for Gateways 8201

OSSV Windows for Filers 8202

OSSV Linux for Gateways 8203

OSSV Linux for Filers 8204

OSSV OFM for Gateways 8205

OSSV OFM for Filers 8206

OSSV UNIX for Gateways 8207

OSSV UNIX for Filers 8208

OSSV VMWare for Gateways 8209

OSSV VMWare for Filers 8210

DataFabric Manager Server 8255

Operations Manager Store Resource Management 8257

Operations Manager Core tier 1 license 8261







Protection Manager tier 1 license 8268






Table 75. IBM N series host software (continued)

Description Feature



Provisioning Manager tier 1 license 8275







Provisioning Manager DR tier 1 license 8282







Operations Manager for N3400 8400

Protection Manager for N3400 8401

Provisioning Manager for N3400 8402

Protection Manager DR for N3400 8403


Chapter 4. Site planning

This chapter contains the following information for site planning for the N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units.v “System connectivity requirements”v “Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements” on page 128v “Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console” on page 130v “Hardware specifications” on page 132

System connectivity requirementsYour system requires the following types of connections:

Fibre ChannelConnects your appliance to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tapebackup devices, and to other storage devices. They can connect throughthe following media:v Copperv Fiber

EthernetConnects your appliance to an Ethernet network through the followingmedia:v Copperv Fiber

Fibre Channel connectivityYour appliance connects to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tape backupdevices, and other storage through onboard ports or adapter ports. The followingillustration shows a typical LC connector used to connect Fibre Channel devices.

PORT 1

PORT 2

FIBRECHANNEL

LC connector

FCPTARGET

Figure 4. LC connector


Ethernet connectivityYour appliance connects to a GbE network through either onboard ports or GbEnetwork interface cards (NICs) which support either copper or fiber cabling.

The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 micron multimodefiber optic cables, with LC or SC connectors, connected to dual-port or quad-portFibre Channel NICs.

Wavelength(Nanometers)

Core size(microns)

ModalBandwidth(MHz/km)

Distance(Meters) Card (speed)

850 50 500 500 1 Gb

300 2 Gb

150 4 Gb

50 8 Gb

2000 860 1 Gb

500 2 Gb

270 4 Gb

150 8 Gb

Copper GbE cabling and NICs: The cabling and network requirements are forGbE and 10GbE networks using copper cabling.

Types: Single-port, dual-port, quad-portConnector type: RJ-45 for allCable type: Category 5, Category 5E or Category 6 unshielded four-pair cablefor 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX

ACT/LNK

PORT A

PORT B

PORT C

ACT/LNK A

ACT/LNK B10=OFF100=GRN1000=ORG

ACT/LNK

10=OFF100=GRN1000=ORG

Quad-port

Copper cable

RJ-45 connector

10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-TX NICs

Dual-port

Single-port

Figure 5. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs


Note: Category 5 cables that do not have four-pair wires do not work properlywith 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX speed networks. UseCategory 6 cables for these networks.

Maximum distance: 100mFiber GbE cabling and NICs: The following cabling and network requirementsare for GbE networks using optical cabling.

The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 or 62.5 micronmultimode fiber optic cables, with LC or LC duplex connectors for the1000BASE-SX NICs, connected to single-port or dual-port Fibre Channel GbENICs.

Wavelength(Nanometers)MM laser

Core size(microns)

ModalBandwidth(MHz/km)

Distance(Meters) Card type

850 50 500 550 1000BASE-SX

62.5 160 220

62.5 200 275

62.5 200 33

50 2,000 300

Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cardsDo not use less than the recommended 2,000 Mhz/km bandwidth for 10GBASESRcards. The following table lists maximum distances supported by some morecommon cable bandwidths.

Wavelength(Nanometers) Core size (microns)

Modal Bandwidth(MHz/km) Distance (Meters)

850 50 2,000 300

ACT/LNK A

ACT/LNK B

LC connectorACT/LNK

Dual-port

1000Base-SX NICs

Single-port

Figure 6. 1000Base-SX NICs

Chapter 4. Site planning 127

Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirementsNEMA

If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuitbreakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw. Youshould not load a circuit beyond 80% of the rated limit for the circuit.

For example, if you have a 20A circuit, you should load it to no more than16A of draw.

IEC If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuitbreakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw.

For example, if you have a 16A circuit, you should load it to no more than16A of draw.

Attention: Overloading circuit breakers can lead to tripped breakers or powerbrownouts that can cause system errors.

Balancing the load across PDUsA best practice is to plan how to distribute the total load across the PDU banksprior to plugging your system components into them. You should make each bankload as equal as possible.

Keep the following considerations in mind when planning to balance the load:v Balancing the load depends on the number of components being connected and

the location of the component power supply units (PSUs), as shown in thefollowing illustrations.

v You should connect the components to different PDUs on opposite sides of thesystem cabinet, using the illustrations for reference.

v You should plug each component into the PDU outlet directly across from thecomponent, using the illustrations for reference.

Examples of balancing the load with a single componentThe following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of a singlecomponent, such as a controller in a single chassis, to the system cabinet PDUs.

2

1 3

4

Figure 7. PSUs on opposite sides of the component


1 PSU 1

2 Left PDU outlet

3 PSU 2

4 Right PDU outlet

Examples of balancing the load with two componentsThe following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of twocomponents, such as a component with two controller modules in a single chassisor two components close together, to the system cabinet PDUs.

1

2

3

4

Figure 8. PSUs on the same side of the component

1

2

3

4

Figure 9. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component

5

6

1

2

10

9

8

37

1114

13

4

12

Figure 10. PSUs on opposite sides of the component


1 Left PDU, bank A

2 Left PDU, bank B

3 Right PDU, bank A

4 Right PDU, bank B

5 PSU 1, component 1

6 Left PDU, bank A outlet


8 Right PDU, bank A outlet


10 Left PDU, bank B outlet


12 Right PDU, bank B outlet

13 Component 1

14 Component 2

Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal consoleThe ASCII terminal console enables you to monitor the boot process, helps youconfigure your system after it boots, and enables you to perform systemadministration.

5

6

1

2

10

9

8

3

14

13

4

12

11

7

Figure 11. PSUs on the same side of the component

7

6

1

2

10

9

8

3

14

13

4

12

11

5

Figure 12. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component


ASCII terminal console wiringThe following table lists the RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal consolewiring.

Table 76. RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal wiring

Pin number Signal

1 Connected to pin 8

2 Not connected

3 TXD (from system)

4 GND

5 GND

6 RXD (to system)

7 Not connected

8 Connected to pin 1

DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connectionsYou use the DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter to connect the ASCII terminal console toyour N6000 series system. Its purpose is to convert the RJ-45 pinout on the systemto the DB-9 pinout, like those on other IBM products, and all PCs.

The following table lists the console adapter pin number connections between thePC-style DB-9 male connector and the RJ-45 connection on your system.

Table 77. Console adapter pin number connections

RJ-45 Signal DB-9 male

1 [not connected]

2 [not connected]

3 (connected to pin 3 onDB-9)

TXD 3 (connected to pin 3 on RJ-45)


GND 5 (connected to pin 4 on RJ-45)

5 [not connected]


RXD 2 (connected to pin 6 on RJ-45)

7 [not connected] [not connected] 1

8 [not connected] [not connected] 4

[not connected] 6 through 9

Connecting to an ASCII terminal consoleTo connect an ASCII terminal console to the system, complete the following steps.1. Set the following communications parameters to the same values for both the N

series system and ASCII terminal.

Table 78. Communication parameters

Parameter Setting

Baud 9600


Table 78. Communication parameters (continued)

Parameter Setting

Data bit 8

Parity None

Stop bits 1

Flow control None

Note: See your terminal documentation for information about changing yourASCII console terminal settings.

2. Connect the DB-9 null modem cable to the DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter cable, andthen connect the RJ-45 end to the console port on the system and the other endto the ASCII terminal.

Hardware specificationsThe following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units:v “N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications” on page 133v “N3700 hardware specifications” on page 146v “N5000 series system hardware specifications” on page 148v “N6000 series system hardware specifications” on page 152v “N6200 series hardware specifications” on page 157v “N7000 series hardware specifications” on page 161v “N7x50T series hardware specifications” on page 164v “EXN1000 hardware specifications” on page 166v “EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications” on page 168v “EXN3000 hardware specifications” on page 171v “EXN3500 hardware specifications” on page 174

How the measurements are madeThese published system measurements are conservative. The followingassumptions, conditions, and observations apply to these measurements:v Line voltage is either 100V AC or 200V AC.v Current and power are steady state rms values.v Heat dissipation in BTU/hour is based on Watts multiplied by 3.4129.v Measurements are taken at room ambient.v Data is collected for each individual controller, controller module, or storage

expansion unit, not for clustered systems or other combinations (except forplatforms that have two controllers in one chassis).

v Each controller or storage expansion unit is fully populated with a particulardrive type and speed and exercised with multiple threads of a disk stress testprogram.

v Controllers or controller modules with PCI slots are fully populated and areexercised with test program.

v To account for customer work loads that exceed these conditions, the totalsystem workload is calculated using random disk_qual to obtain electricalcurrent, power, and heat dissipation values.


v If the system configuration causes fan speed to increase or decrease, the data iscollected in that mode.

v Because fan speed can vary for a given set of conditions, the worst case set ofnumbers is presented.

v Electrical requirements for systems containing performance accelerator modulesare measured with the maximum number of these modules installed in thesystem.

Converting watts to volt-amps (VA)Use the following formula to calculate VA from watts:

VA = Watts/PFPF = 0.95Watts = Watts listed in the individual tables

Important information about ambient temperatureIBM N series systems have variable speed cooling fans. At higher ambienttemperatures, the fans will spin faster and consume more power. This maycounteract some energy savings anticipated by rasing the ambient temperature.

You should operate your system within the ambient temperature range of 10-40° C.As the temperature increases, the reliability and life expectancy of electronics andhard disk drives decreases.

N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.

CAUTION:Two people are required to lift the N3300 or N3400 system during installation.Three people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation.

Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increasethe risk of device failure.

Table 79. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics

Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

Active/active (or highavailability) controller with 12SAS disk drives: 31.1 kg (68.6 lb)

Single controller with no diskdrives: 19.5 kg (43.0 lb)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 Active/active (or highavailability) controller with 20SAS disk drives: 51 kg (112 lb)

Single controller with no diskdrives: 32.6 kg (72 lb)

Rack units 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

2U

2862-A10, 2862-A20 4U

Height 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

8.85 cm (3.5 in.)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 17.75 cm (6.95 in.)


Table 79. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics (continued)

Width All models 44.6 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

56.9 cm (22.4 in)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 58.5 cm (23 in)

Table 80. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system clearance dimensions

Front-cooling 10 in. (25.4 cm)

Rear-cooling 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm)

Rear-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm)

Table 81. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 158° F

(-40° C to 70° C)

Relative humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range 40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level N3300, N3400 54 dBA @ 23° C

7.2 bels @ 23° C

N3600 49 dBA @ 23° C

6.7 bels @ 23° C

Table 82 lists the maximum electrical power for the N3300, N3400 and N3600

Table 82. N3300, N3400 and N3600 maximum electrical power

System Maximum electrical power

N3300 and N3400 100-240 V ac, 10-4 A, 50-60 Hz

N3600 100-240 V ac, 12-5 A, 50-60 Hz

Notes:

1. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed, with power distributed over one power cord. Per PSU indicatestypical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal condition.System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating undernormal condition and power distributed over two power cords.

2. 600 GB SAS drives are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N3600.3. 2 TB and 3 TB SATA drives are supported for the N3300 and N3400.


Table 83. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System


Input currentmeasured, A

144 GBSASdrives

3.83 1.7 3.39 1.94 0.94 1.87

300 GBSASdrives

4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16

450 GBSASdrives

4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16

600 GBSASdrives

3.75 1.84 3.68 1.90 0.94 1.87

500 GBSATAdrives

3.22 1.55 3.09 1.68 0.81 1.61

750 GBSATAdrives

3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66

1 TBSATAdrives

3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66

2 TBSATAdrives

3.36 1.65 3.29 1.69 0.84 1.68

Input powermeasured, W

144 GBSASdrives

377 165 330 371 174 348

300 GBSASdrives

439 191 381 431 204 407

450 GBSASdrives

439 191 381 431 204 407

600 SASdrives

375 182 364 360 178 355

500 GBSATAdrives

319 151 301 322 147 294

750 GBSATAdrives

332 158 316 327 152.5 305

1 TBSATAdrives

332 158 316 327 152.5 305

2 TBSATAdrives

334 162 324 326 160 320


Table 83. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Thermaldissipation,BTU/hr

144 GBSASdrives

1287 563 1125 1264 593 1185

300 GBSASdrives

1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338

450 GBSASdrives

1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338

600 SASdrives

1279 621 1242 1228 606 1211

500 GBSATAdrives

1088 514 1028 1099 501 1002

750 GBSATAdrives

1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039

1 TBSATAdrives

1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039

2 TBSATAdrives

1139 553 1105 1112 546 1092

Input power frequency,Hz

50 to 60


Table 84. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

4.69 2.05 4.09 2.34 1.11 2.22

300 GBSASdrives

4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37

450 GBSASdrives

4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37

600 GBSAS drive

4.73 2.29 4.57 2.32 1.15 2.29

500 GBSATAdrives

3.94 1.90 3.80 1.97 0.97 1.93

750 GBSATAdrives

4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98

1 TBSATAdrives

4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98

2 TBSATAdrives

4.22 2.06 4.12 2.11 1.04 2.08


144 GBSASdrives

464 200 400 452 210 419

300 GBSASdrives

488 233 465 476 224 448

450 GBSASdrives

488 233 465 476 224 448

600 GBSAS drive

458 229 458 448 216 432

500 GBSATAdrives

389 186 372 381 180 360

750 GBSATAdrives

409 191 382 404 186 372

1 TBSATAdrives

409 191 382 404 186 372

2 TBSATAdrives

415 201 401 405 195 390


Table 84. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

1583 683 1365 1542 714.5 1429

300 GBSASdrives

1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527

450 GBSASdrives

1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527

600 GBSAS drive

1562 781 1562 1528 737 1474

500 GBSATAdrives

1328 634 1268 1298 614 1227

750 GBSATAdrives

1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268

1 TBSATAdrives

1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268

2 TBSATAdrives

1416 684 1368 1382 665 1330


50 to 60

Table 85. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System


1.67 0.8 1.60 0.9 0.45 0.89


165 77 153 160 75 149


563 261 521 544 253 506

Input powerfrequency, Hz

50 to 60

Table 86. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



2.63 1.12 2.23 1.34 0.59 1.18


254 108 215 240 104 208


Table 86. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



866 366 731 818 355 709


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

4.08 1.98 3.96 2.3 1 2

450 GBSASdrives

3.96 1.92 3.84 1.97 0.97 1.94

600 GBSASdrives

3.87 1.92 3.83 1.91 0.96 1.91

500 GBSATAdrives

3.25 1.59 3.17 1.62 0.81 1.62

750 GBSATAdrives

3.38 1.64 3.27 1.69 0.84 1.68

1 TBSATAdrives

3.62 1.77 3.53 1.81 0.90 1.8

2 TBSATAdrives

3.34 1.61 3.22 1.66 0.84 1.67



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

404 194 387 392 189 378

450 GBSATAdrives

391 188 375 379 184 367

600 GBSASdrives

387 188 376 368 181 361

500 GBSATAdrives

319 155 310 310 151 301

750 GBSATAdrives

333 161 322 324 157 314

1 TBSATAdrives

357 173 345 347 169 337

2 TBSATAdrives

329 158 315 319 156 312


300 GBSASdrives

1378 660 1320 1337 645 1289

450 GBSASdrives

1333 640 1279 1292 626 1252

600 GBSASdrives

1319 641 1282 1254 616 1231

500 GBSATAdrives

1088 529 1057 1057 513 1026

750 GBSATAdrives

1136 549 1098 1105 536 1071

1 TBSATAdrives

1217 589 1177 1183 575 1149

2 TBSATAdrives

1122 537 1074 1088 532 1064


50 to 60



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

4.85 2.33 4.66 2.39 1.18 2.35

450 GBSASdrives

4.70 2.27 4.53 2.32 1.14 2.28

600 GBSASdrives

4.44 2.16 4.32 2.18 1.09 2.18

500 GBSATAdrives

3.95 1.92 3.84 1.97 0.98 1.95

750 GBSATAdrives

4.10 1.99 3.98 2.04 1.01 2.01

1 TBSATAdrives

4.36 2.12 4.23 2.16 1.06 2.12

2 TBSATAdrives

3.92 1.94 3.88 1.97 0.98 1.96


300 GBSASdrives

480 229 457 464 224 447

450 GBSASdrives

464 223 445 451 216 432

600 GBSASdrives

440 212 424 425 208 415

500 GBSATAdrives

390 188 376 379 184 367

750 GBSATAdrives

405 195 389 393 191 381

1 TBSATAdrives

4.29 207 414 416 202 403

2 TBSATAdrives

387 189 378 382 186 371



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

1637 779 1558 1582 762 1524

450 GBSASdrives

1582 759 1518 1538 737 1473

600 GBSASdrives

1500 723 1445 1449 708 1415

500 GBSATAdrives

1330 641 1282 1292 626 1252

750 GBSATAdrives

1381 664 1327 1340 650 1299

1 TBSATAdrives

1463 706 1412 1419 687 1374

2 TBSATAdrives

1319 644 1288 1302 633 1265


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



1.4 0.7 1.4 0.77 0.39 0.78


137 67 133 134 65 130


467 227 454 457 222 443


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



1.96 0.98 1.95 1.02 0.52 1.04


192 94 187 188 91 182


Table 90. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



655 319 638 641 311 621


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

5.64 2.38 4.76 2.82 1.33 2.65

300 GBSASdrives

6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 2.76 5.52

450 GBSASdrives

6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 1.38 2.76

500 GBSATAdrives

4.64 2.18 4.36 2.33 1.09 2.17

750 GBSATAdrives

5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40

1 TBSATAdrives

5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40


144 GBSASdrives

560 233 465 547 251 502

300 GBSASdrives

658 292 583 636 262 523

450 GBSASdrives

658 292 583 636 266 523

500 GBSATAdrives

459 213 425 447 204 408

750 GBSATAdrives

504 220 439 474 224 447

1 TBSATAdrives

504 220 439 474 224 447



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

1909 794 1587 1864 855 1710

300 GBSASdrives

2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782

450 GBSASdrives

2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782

500 GBSATAdrives

1564 724 1448 1523 696 1392

750 GBSATAdrives

1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523

1 TBSATAdrives

1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

6.31 2.84 5.68 3.09 1.45 2.89

300 GBSASdrives

7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41

450 GBSASdrives

7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41

500 GBSATAdrives

5.74 2.84 5.67 2.89 1.33 2.65

750 GBSATAdrives

5.91 2.74 5.74 2.97 1.39 2.77

1 TBSATAdrives

5.91 2.74 5.47 2.97 1.39 2.77



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

628 279 558 600 275 550

300 GBSASdrives

747 330 659 728 328 655

450 GBSASdrives

747 330 659 728 328 655

500 GBSATAdrives

567 277 554 561 252 503

750 GBSATAdrives

585 268 536 575 262 524

1 TBSATAdrives

585 268 536 575 262 524


144 GBSASdrives

2142 951 1902 2044 938 1876

300 GBSASdrives

2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232

450 GBSASdrives

2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232

500 GBSATAdrives

1932 946 1891 1913 857 1714

750 GBSATAdrives

1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785

1 TBSATAdrives

1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



2.10 0.90 1.80 1.10 0.50 0.99


205 86.5 173 198 84 168


Table 93. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



698 295 589 675 287 574


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



2.62 1.19 2.37 1.35 0.62 1.24


256 114 227 250 111 222


874 387 773 851 379 758


50 to 60

N3700 hardware specifications

The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmentalrequirements for your N3700 storage system.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the N3700 during installation. Do notremove the disk drives to reduce the weight.


Table 95. N3700 physical characteristics

Weight With maximum number ofdisk drives

78.8 lb (35.8 kg)

Empty 50.6 lb (23 kg)

Rack units 3U

Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)

Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)

Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Table 96. N3700 clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)


Table 97. N3700 environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)


Recommended operating temperaturerelative humidity range

40 to 55%


Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of

machines.b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.f. N/A - not available.

2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center ofthe unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformancewith ISO 9296.

Table 98. N3700 electrical requirements

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

TypicalsinglePSU/system Worst-case

TypicalsinglePSU/system


10K drives 3.12 1.88/3.76 1.52 0.92/1.83

15K drives 3.83 2.15/4.30 1.83 1.04


10K drives 311 187.5/375 299 177.5/355

15K drives 382 214.5/429 361 202.5/405


10K drives 1062 639.5/1279 1020 606/1212

15K drives 1302 731.5/1463 1230 690/1380

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60


Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

N5000 series system hardware specifications

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental andelectrical requirements for N5000 series systems.

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb). Ittakes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)


svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

Table 99. N5000 series physical characteristics

Weight 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

75 lb (34 kg)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

150 lb (68 kg)

Rack units 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

3U

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

6U

Height 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

5.12 in. (13 cm)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

10.2 in. (26 cm)

Width All models 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth All models 61 cm (24 in) without cablemanagement tray

76.2 cm (30 in) with cablemanagement tray

Table 100. N5000 series clearance dimensions

Front-cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance 12 in. (30.5 cm)


Table 101. N5000 series environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)


Recommended operating temperature relative humidityrange

40 to 55%



Acoustic level1, 4 54 dBA @ 23° C

5.4 bels @ 23° C










In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





3.39 1.2/2.4 1.77 0.71/1.40 8.2 2.85/5.70


336 118/236 329 115/229 328 113/226


1144 402.5/805 1122 392/783 1118 286/771


Table 102. N5200 electrical requirements (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





50 to 60 n/a n/a


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





3.66 1.7/3.4 1.9 0.95/1.9 7.94 3.7/7.4


363 169/228 358 165/330 318 148/296


1238 576/1152 1221 564/1127 1084 506/1011


50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 104. N5300 electrical requirements with one Performance Accelerator Module card

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case,singlePSU







4.21 1.82/3.63 2.21 1.04/2.07 9.74 4.12/8.21


418 178/355 417 175/350 389 164/328


1425 606/1212 1422 597/1193 1328 560/1119


50 to 60 n/a n/a


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





3.88 1.7/3.4 2.04 0.95/1.9 9.49 4.0/8.0


Table 105. N5500 electrical requirements (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





386 164/328 384 164/327 380 160/319


1317 560/1119 1309 559/1116 1295 545/1089


50 to 60 n/a n/a


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case





4.03 1.85/3.7 2.06 1.05/2.1 10.57 4.7/9.4


400 181/362 387 178/355 423 188/376


1365 617/1233 1320 606/1212 1442 642/1283


50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 107. N5600 electrical requirements with two Performance Accelerator Module cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V








4.51 2.04/4.08 2.29 1.22/2.43 10.67 4.63/9.26


449 201/402 438 208/415 427 185/370


1530 685/1369 1493 707/1414 1455 632/1263


50 to 60 n/a n/a


N6000 series system hardware specifications

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 44 and 54 kg (97 and 118 lb). Ittakes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for the N6000 seriessystem.



Weight v A10: 44.4 kg (97.8 lb)

v A20: 52.2 kg (115 lb)

v A11: 44.9 kg (99 lb)

v A21: 53.2 kg (117.3 lb)

v A12: 44.8 kg (98.8 lb)

v A22: 53.1 kg (117 lb)

Rack units 6U

Height 25.9 cm (10.2 in.)

Width 44.7 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth 61.7 cm (24.3 in.) without cabletray

71.3 cm (28.1 in.) with cable tray


Front-cooling All versions 15.2 cm (6 in.)

Rear-cooling All versions 30.5 cm (12 in.)

Front-maintenance All versions 76.2 cm (30 in.)

Rear-maintenance All versions 91.4 cm (36 in.)



(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)


Table 110. N6000 series environmental requirements (continued)



40 to 55%



Acoustic level - Normal operating conditions at 22° Cat sea level

≤ 61 dBA sound pressure (LpA)

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6000 seriessystems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6000series systems.

Table 111. N6000 series systems maximum electrical power


N6000 series systems 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 47-63 Hz

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running onePSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 112. N6040 electrical requirements–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical Worst-case,singlePSU

Typical

Per PSUSystem,two PSUs Per PSU

System,two PSUs


3.98 1.89 3.77 1.97 0.97 1.93


396 187 373 385 183 366


1350 636 1272 1313 625 1249


50 to 60

Table 113. N6040 electrical requirements–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


7.38 2.99 5.97 3.60 1.49 2.98


736 297 594 712 291 581


2509 1013 2026 2427 991 1981


||

Table 113. N6040 electrical requirements–two controller modules (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


50 to 60

Table 114. N6040 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.06 1.93 3.86 2.01 0.99 1.98


402 192 383 396 190 379


1372 654 1307 1352 647 1293


50 to 60

Table 115. N6040 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


7.69 3.29 6.58 3.75 1.58 3.15


769 328 655 745 315 630


2625 1117 2234 2543 1075 2150


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.80 2.25 4.50 2.38 1.16 2.32


Table 116. N6060 electrical requirements–one controller module (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


476 220 440 460 225 450


1625 751 1502 1570 768 1535


50 to 60


Input voltage 100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case,single PSU

Typical Worst-case,single PSU

Typical

Per PSU System,two PSUs

Per PSU System,two PSUs


9.25 3.88 7.76 4.40 2.15 4.30


916 380 760 860 419 838


3126 1297 2594 2935 1430 2860


50 to 60

Table 118. N6060 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.90 2.31 4.62 2.44 1.19 2.38


487 227 453 478 230 460


1662 773 1546 1631 785 1570


50 to 60


Table 119. N6060 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


9.65 4.09 8.17 4.51 2.28 4.55


959 405 809 890 441 882


3273 1381 2761 3037 1505 3010


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.07 2.37 4.74 2.52 1.19 2.38


505 235 470 493 230 459


1722 801 1602 1680 782 1564


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


9.74 4.07 8.14 4.69 2.02 4.03


969 405 810 930 394 788


3305 1381 2761 3170 1343 2686


50 to 60


Table 122. N6070 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.27 2.49 4.98 2.62 1.25 2.5


525 247 494 513 241 482


1790 843 1685 1749 822 1644


50 to 60

Table 123. N6070 electrical requirements with eight PAM I or II cards–two controllermodules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


10.54 4.49 8.98 5.08 2.22 4.44


1048 447 894 1006 434 868


3574 1525 3049 3430 1480 2960


50 to 60

N6200 series hardware specifications


svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER





Weight v 2858-C10 (single enclosure withone controller): 29.67.kg (65.41lb)

v 2858-C20 (single enclosure withtwo controllers): 34.52 kg (76.1lb)



v 2858-E11 (single enclosure withone controller and one IOXM):32.94 kg (72.62 lb)

v 2858-E12 (single enclosure withone controller and one IOXM):33.69 kg (74.27 lb)

v 2858-E21 (two enclosures, eachwith one controller and oneIOXM): 65.88 kg (145.24 lb)

v 2858-E22 (two enclosures, eachwith one controller and oneIOXM): 67.38 kg (148.55 lb)

Rack units v 3U for single enclosure models

v 6U for dual enclosure models

Height v 13 cm (5.12 in.) for singleenclosure models

v 26 cm (10.24 in.) for dualenclosure models

Width 44.7 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth 61 cm (24 in.) without bezel64.5 cm (25.4 in.) with beze1


Airflow Front 25.4 cm (10 in.)

Rear 30.5 cm (12 in.)

Service Front 76.2 cm (30.5 in.)

Rear 76.2 cm (30.5 in.)


Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F (20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 158° F (-40° C to 70° C)

Operating relative humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing

Nonoperating relative humidity 10 to 95% noncondensing (inoriginal container)


Table 126. N6200 series environmental requirements (continued)


40 to 55%




55.4 dBA sound pressure (LpA)

7.1 B sound power (LWAd)

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6200 seriessystems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6200series systems.

Table 127. N6200 series systems maximum electrical power


N6200 series systems 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 50-60 Hz.

In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running onePSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 128. N6210 electrical requirements–one controller node, with one 256-Gb FlashCache module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.22 1.52 3.03 2.11 0.83 1.66


421 150 299 411 147 293


1437 511 1021 1403 500 1000


50 to 60

Table 129. N6210 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb FlashCache module per node

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


6.27 2.32 4.64 3.11 1.19 2.38


626 231 462 612 225 450


||

Table 129. N6210 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb FlashCache module per node (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


2137 789 1577 2089 768 1536


50 to 60

Table 130. N6240 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb, one512-Gb, or one 1-TB Flash Cache module per controller node

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


6.37 2.35 4.70 3.15 1.21 2.41


635 233 466 620 228 456


2168 796 1591 2116 779 1557


50 to 60

Table 131. N6240 electrical requirements–one controller node, with one 256-Gb , one512-Gb , or one 1-TB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.01 1.86 3.71 2.50 0.98 1.96


500 184 368 478 180 360


1707 628 1256 1662 615 1229


50 to 60


Table 132. N6270 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb, one512-Gb, or one 1-TB Flash Cache module per controller node

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


7.28 2.78 5.56 3.58 1.42 2.83


728 278 552 707 271 541


2485 942 1884 2413 924 1847


50 to 60

Table 133. N6270 electrical requirements–one controller node, with one 256-Gb, one512-Gb, or one 1-TB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.47 2.07 4.14 2.73 1.07 2.13


547 204 408 533 199 398


1867 697 1393 1820 680 1359


50 to 60

N7000 series hardware specifications

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental andelectrical requirements for N7000 series systems.


DANGER



Table 134. N7000 series system physical characteristics

Weight 2866-A11, 2867-A11 54.8 kg (121 lb)

2866-A21, 2867-A21 109.6 kg (242 lb)

Rack units 2866-A11, 2867-A11 6U

2866-A21, 2867-A21 12U

Height 2866-A11, 2867-A11 263 mm (10.4 in)

2866-A21, 2867-A21 526 mm (20.8 in)

Width 446 mm (17.6 in)

Depth 695 mm (27.4 in) without cablemanagement tray782 mm (30.8 in) with cablemanagement tray

Table 135. N7000 series system clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.2 cm)

Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 40 in. (102 cm)

Table 136. N7000 series system environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F(-40° C to 65° C)


Recommended operating temperature relativehumidity range

40 to 55%


Maximum altitude,2 3 2133 m (7,000 ft.)




||

Table 136. N7000 series system environmental requirements (continued)










In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 137. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-caseTypical singlePSU/system Worst-case

Typical singlePSU/system


9.26 2.75/5.4 4.6 1.4/2.8

Input power measured,W

922 266/531 882 255/509

Thermal dissipation,BTU/hr

3144 906/1812 3008 869/1737


50 to 60

Table 138. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements with four Performance AcceleratorModule I or II cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V






10.15 3.03/6.05 5.06 1.65/3.29


1009 293/585 969 289/578


3440 998/1996 3305 985/1969


50 to 60


Table 139. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-caseTypical singlePSU/system Worst-case



9.72 2.8/5.6 4.84 1.45/2.9


966 274/548 928 266/532


3293 935/1870 3166 908/1816


50 to 60

Table 140. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements with five Performance AcceleratorModule I or II cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V






12.11 3.85/7.70 5.97 2.07/4.14


1203 376/752 1158 368/736


4104 1283/2566 3950 1255/2509


50 to 60

N7x50T series hardware specificationsThe following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.

svc00169

55 kg ( 121.2 lbs)

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is more than 55 kg (121.2 lb). It takes speciallytrained persons, a lifting device, or both to safely lift this part or unit. (C011)


Table 141. N7x50T series physical characteristics

Weight N7950T

v Per enclosure: 58.6 kg (129.2 lb)

v Both enclosures: 117.2 kg (258.4lb)


Table 141. N7x50T series physical characteristics (continued)

Rack units v Per enclosure: 6U

v Both enclosures: 12U

Height N7950T

v Per enclosure: 25.9 cm (10.2 in.)

v Both enclosures: 51.8 cm (20.4in.)

Width 44.7 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth v Without cable managementarms: 62.7 cm (24.7 in.)

v With cable management arms:74.6 cm (29.4 in.)

Table 142. N7x50T series clearance dimensions

Airflow Front 5.2 cm (6 in.)

Rear 30.5 cm (12 in.)

Service Front 63.5 cm (25 in.)

Rear 102 cm (40 in.)

Table 143. N7x50T series environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F (20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 158° F (-40° C to 70° C)

Operating relative humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing

Nonoperating relative humidity 10 to 95% noncondensing (inoriginal container)


40 to 55%





7.5 B sound power (LWAd)

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N7x50T seriessystems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N7x50Tseries systems.

Table 144. N7x50T series systems maximum electrical power


N7x50T series systems 100-240 V ac, 12-7.8 A, 50-60 Hz.

In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running onePSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.


||

Table 145. Electrical requirements–N7950T controller module and I/O expansion module,with all card slots filled, 25W draw per card

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


9.6 3.5 6.9 4.7 1.79 3.5


950 332.5 665 910 323 645


3243 1135 2270 3106 1101 2202


50 to 60

EXN1000 hardware specificationsThe following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000storage expansion unit.


DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation.


Table 146. EXN1000 physical characteristics


68 lbs (30.8 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3


Width 17.6 in. (44.7 cm)


Table 147. EXN1000 clearance dimensions

Front–cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear–cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5)

Front–maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm)

Table 148. EXN1000 environmental requirements

Operating temperature range 41° F to 104° F

(5° C to 40° C)


Table 148. EXN1000 environmental requirements (continued)


(-40° C to 60° C)


Acoustic level - Normal operating conditions at 23° C at sealevel

58 dB sound pressure (LpA)










Table 149. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives, HE PSUs)

Input voltage Size (GB)

100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


750 GB 2.72 1.24 2.48 1.28 0.61 1.21

1 TB 2.51 1.19 2.38 1.22 0.59 1.17

2 TB 2.50 1.17 2.34 1.28 0.61 1.21


750 GB 271 124 247 254 120 240

1 TB 250 119 237 243 117 233

2 TB 249 115 230 246 107 214


750 GB 924 421 842 866 410 819

1 TB 853 404 808 829 398 795

2 TB 849 392 784 839 365 730


||

Table 150. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


250 GB 2.79 1.36 2.72 1.38 0.70 1.39

320 GB 2.85 1.56 3.12 1.43 0.78 1.56

500 GB 2.94 1.45 2.9 1.43 0.74 1.47

750 GB 3.42 1.61 3.22 1.63 0.53 1.60

1 TB 3.15 1.55 3.10 1.55 0.78 1.56


250 GB 279 136 271 271 132 264

320 GB 284 155 310 283 152 304

500 GB 293 144 288 286 142 283

750 GB 341 161 321 323 155 309

1 TB 315 154 308 309 150 300


250 GB 953 462 923 923 450 900

320 GB 968 529 1058 964 518 1035

500 GB 998 492 983 975 482 964

750 GB 1163 548 1095 1103 527 1054

1 TB 1073 525 1050 1054 512 1024

EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN2000 orEXN4000 storage expansion unit.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN2000 or EXN4000 during installation.

Table 151. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics


77 lbs (35 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3U


Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)


Table 152. EXN2000 and EXN4000 clearance dimensions

Front–cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear–cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5)

Front–maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm)


Table 153. EXN2000 and EXN4000 environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)



40 to 55%



Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C










Table 154. EXN2000 electrical requirements (10K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.31 1.72 3.43 1.61 0.84 1.67

144 GB 3.56 1.72 3.43 1.75 0.87 1.73

288 GB 4.0 1.95 3.89 1.96 0.95 1.9


72 GB 330 171 342 318 162 323

144 GB 356 171 342 348 167 334

288 GB 399 194 387 420 187 374


Table 154. EXN2000 electrical requirements (10K speed drives) (continued)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 1125 584 1167 1084 552 1103

144 GB 1215 584 1167 1185 570 1140

288 GB 1362 660 1320 1433 638 1275



100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.41 1.82 3.63 1.67 0.89 1.78

144 GB 3.96 1.88 3.75 1.93 0.94 1.88

288 GB 4.43 2.16 4.32 2.23 1.07 2.13

450 GB 4.43 2.16 4.32 2.23 1.07 2.13


72 GB 340 181 362 331 173 345

144 GB 395 187 373 383 183 365

288 GB 443 216 431 443 208 415

450 GB 443 216 431 443 208 415


72 GB 1159 617 1234 1129 589 1178

144 GB 1347 636 1272 1245 653 1305

288 GB 1512 735 1470 1512 707 1414

450 GB 1512 735 1470 1512 707 1414



100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 2.81 1.51 3.01 1.38 0.76 1.51

144 GB 3.44 1.68 3.36 1.68 0.83 1.66

288 GB 3.89 1.89 3.78 1.90 0.94 1.87


72 GB 279 150 299 272 145 290

144 GB 344 167 334 333 161 321

288 GB 388 189 377 376 182 364


72 GB 953 510 1020 926 495 990

144 GB 1174 570 1140 1137 548 1095

288 GB 1324 644 1287 1283 621 1242




100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.42 1.83 3.65 1.66 0.91 1.82

144 GB 3.54 1.73 3.45 1.73 0.87 1.73

288 GB 4.52 2.14 4.27 2.23 1.06 2.12

450 GB 4.52 2.14 4.27 2.23 1.06 2.12


72 GB 342 182 363 329 177 353

144 GB 354 172 344 343 167 334

288 GB 451 213 426 443 207 414

450 GB 451 213 426 443 207 414


72 GB 1167 619 1238 1222 602 1204

144 GB 1208 587 1174 1170 570 1140

288 GB 1538 726 1452 1512 705 1410

450 GB 1538 726 1452 1512 705 1410

Table 158. EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical


Typical


System,two PSUs


144 GB 2.82 1.33 2.66 1.36 0.65 1.30

288 GB 3.39 1.65 3.29 1.75 0.81 1.61

450 GB 3.59 1.65 3.29 1.75 0.81 1.61

600 GB 3.44 1.62 3.24 1.70 0.84 1.68


144 GB 281 133 265 270 130 259

288 GB 358 164 328 349 161 321

450 GB 358 164 328 349 161 321

600 GB 342 161 321 332 158 316


144 GB 959 452 904 921 442 883

288 GB 1221 560 1119 1191 548 1095

450 GB 1221 560 1119 1191 548 1095

600 GB 1166 547 1094 1132 539 1077

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

EXN3000 hardware specificationsThe following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN3000storage expansion unit.


DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN3000 during installation.

Note: For detailed EXN3000 electrical requirements with SAS and SATA drives, seeTable 163 on page 173 and Table 164 on page 174.




98.3 lbs (44.6 kg)

Without disk drives 52.8 lbs (24 kg)

Empty 21.5 lbs (9.8 kg)

Rack units 4U


Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth 25.7 in. (65.4 cm)


Front (cooling) 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear (cooling and maintenance) 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front (maintenance) 25 in. (55.95 cm)

Table 161. EXN3000 environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 10° C to 40° C

(50° F to 104° F)

Operating temperature recommended range 20° C to 25° C

(68° F to 77° F)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° C to 65° C

(-40° F to 149° F)

Recommended operating range (relative humidity) 40 to 55%

Maximum operating range (relative humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing)

Non-operating range (relative humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing).



Acoustic level v Idle

– 5.7 bels (SATA drives)

– 6.0 bels (SAS drives)

v Operating

– 6.7 bels (SATA drives)

– 7.0 bels (SAS drives)


Table 162. EXN3000 electrical requirements

Wet bulb (caloric value) v 2,201 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SAS drives)

v 1,542 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SATA drives)

Maximum electrical power 100 to 240 VAC 16-6 A (8-3A max per inlet); 50/60Hz

Nominal Electrical Power v 100 to 120 VAC, 6 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 3 A, 50/60 Hz(SAS drives)

v 100 to 120 VAC, 4.4 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 2.1 A, 50/60 Hz(SATA drives)

Table 163. EXN3000 electrical requirements–SAS drives

Inputvoltage

Size(GB)

100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual)

Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical

Per PSUpair

System,fourPSUs

Per PSUpair

System,fourPSUs

Per PSUpair

System,fourPSUs


300 5.5 3.0 6.0 2.8 1.5 3.0 2.6 1.4 2.8

450 6.0 3.15 6.3 3.0 1.6 3.2 2.8 1.5 3.0

600 5.98 2.86 5.71 2.99 1.44 2.87 n/a


300 550 300 600 560 300 600 559 301 602

450 600 315 630 600 320 640 602 323 645

600 595 284 567 584 274 547 n/a


300 1877 1024 2048 1911 1024 2048 1908 1027 2055

450 2047 1075 2150 2047 1092 2184 2054 1101 2201

600 2028 917 1833 1991 933 1865 n/a

Notes:

1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, andpower distributed over two power cords.

2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a systemoperating under normal conditions.

3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operating undernormal conditions and power distributed over four power cords.

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two orfour power supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four powersupplies and require the use of four power outlets.


Table 164. EXN3000 electrical requirements–SATA drives

Inputvoltage

Size(GB)

100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual)




Typical

Per PSU

System,twoPSUs Per PSU

System,twoPSUs Per PSU

System,twoPSUs


500 4.3 2.2 4.4 2.1 1.1 2.2 1.9 1.05 2.1

1 TB 4.41 2.21 4.42 2.21 1.14 2.27 1.9 1.05 2.1

2 TB 4.72 2.31 4.62 2.42 1.21 2.42 n/a

3 TB 4.95 2.30 4.60 2.43 1.19 2.38

100(SSD)

1.96 0.82 1.63 1.0 0.45 0.9 0.95 0.42 0.84


500 430 220 440 420 220 440 409 226 452

1 TB 439 219 438 429 212 424 409 226 452

2 TB 469 229 458 470 228 456 n/a

3 TB 495 228 456 476 224 448

100(SSD)

196 82 163 200 90 180 205 90 180


500 1467 751 1501 1433 751 1501 1395 771 1542

1 TB 1496 747 1493 1462 724 1447 1395 771 1542

2 TB 1599 781 1561 1602 777 1554 n/a

3 TB 1688 518 1555 1624 764 1528

100(SSD)

669 279 557 683 308 615 700 308 615

Notes:

1. Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU, high fan speed, and powerdistributed over one power cord.

2. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating undernormal conditions.

3. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating undernormal conditions and power distributed over two power cords.

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two orfour power supplies. EXN3000s with SATA disk drives have two powersupplies and require the use of two power outlets.

EXN3500 hardware specificationsThe following tables list the hardware specifications for your EXN3500 storageexpansion unit.

DANGER

Two people are required to lift the EXN3500 during installation.





49 lbs (22.2 kg)

Without disk drives 38.9 lbs (17.6 kg)

Empty 17.8 lbs (8.1 kg)

Rack units 2U


Width 19 in. (48 cm)

Depth 21.4 in. (54.3 cm)


Front (cooling) 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear (cooling and maintenance) 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front (maintenance) 25 in. (55.9 cm)

Table 167. EXN3500 environmental and electrical requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F)

Operating temperature recommended range 20° C to 25° C (68° F to 77° F)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° C to 70° C (-40° F to 158° F)

Recommended operating range (relative humidity) 40 to 55%

Maximum operating range (relative humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing)

Non-operating range (relative humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing)



Acoustic level (SAS drives) 6.2 B (LWAd) (2 PCMs)

Input power frequency, Hz (AC) 50 to 60 Hz

Input power voltage, V RMS (AC) (auto-ranging) 100 to 120V or 200 to 240V

Maximum electrical power 100 to 240 VAC, 12 - 5.9 A; 50/60 Hz

Table 168. EXN3500 electrical requirements–SAS drives


100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual)


Typical

Worst-case,two PSUs

Typical

Per PSUpair

System,four PSUs

Per PSUpair

System,four PSUs


450 4.28 1.38 2.76 2.29 0.79 1.58

600 4.22 1.39 2.77 2.29 0.82 1.64


450 428 137 274 420 135 270

600 422 134 267 418 133 266


450 1461 468 936 1434 461 922

600 1441 456 912 1427 454 908


|

Important factors to considerWhen installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certainenvironmental factors. When you are planning your installation give carefulconsideration to the following:v Weight of the N series storage system. See “Hardware specifications” on page

132. The N series storage system requires three people to install it.v Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in

“Rack considerations.”v Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to provide new service

or install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See “Power supplies andpower requirements” for more information.

v System input power. See “System input power” on page 178 for moreinformation.

v Thermal considerations. See “Thermal considerations” on page 179.v Floor loading. See “Floor-loading specifications” on page 180.v Floor planning. See “Floor plan considerations” on page 180 for more

information.v Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. See

Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 125 and Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” onpage 183.

v AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agentfeatured in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storagesystems that continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6,“AutoSupport,” on page 187.

Rack considerationsThe four recommended racks for the N series storage system are:v IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack)v IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack)v IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack)v IBM 2101 Model N42 (a 42U high rack)

The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-IBMracks, provided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix C,“Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 195.

When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the clusternodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that areordered. Feature codes are available for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” onpage 9.

Power supplies and power requirementsN series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are bothactive at the same time, but have sufficient capacity that if one fails the other canassume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separatepower sources for each power cord are recommended.


Power cords with attached plugs are provided for most ac-powered systems. Thepower cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must bespecified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code containstwo cords, one for each power supply. Power cables vary by country and are listedin Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 191.

Specific voltage information for NAS storage systems and storage expansion unitsis provided in the following tables:v N3300 storage systems:

– Table 83 on page 135– Table 84 on page 137– Table 85 on page 138– Table 86 on page 138

v N3400 storage systems:– Table 87 on page 139– Table 88 on page 141– Table 89 on page 142– Table 90 on page 142

v N3600 storage systems:– Table 91 on page 143– Table 92 on page 144– Table 93 on page 145– Table 94 on page 146

v N3700 storage systems:– Table 98 on page 147

v N5000 series storage systems:– Table 102 on page 149– Table 103 on page 150– Table 104 on page 150– Table 105 on page 150– Table 106 on page 151– Table 107 on page 151

v N6000 series storage systems:– Table 112 on page 153– Table 113 on page 153– Table 114 on page 154– Table 115 on page 154– Table 116 on page 154– Table 117 on page 155– Table 118 on page 155– Table 119 on page 156– Table 120 on page 156– Table 121 on page 156– Table 122 on page 157– Table 123 on page 157

v N6200 series storage systems:


– Table 128 on page 159– Table 129 on page 159– Table 130 on page 160– Table 131 on page 160– Table 132 on page 161– Table 133 on page 161

v N7000 series storage systems:– Table 137 on page 163– Table 138 on page 163– Table 139 on page 164– Table 140 on page 164

v N7x50T series storage systems:– Table 145 on page 166

v EXN1000 storage expansion units:– Table 149 on page 167– Table 150 on page 168

v EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units:– Table 154 on page 169– Table 156 on page 170– Table 157 on page 171– Table 158 on page 171

v EXN3000 storage expansion units:– Table 163 on page 173– Table 164 on page 174

v EXN3500 storage expansion units:– Table 168 on page 175

Important:

1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that itsproposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult anelectrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N seriesstorage system that you are installing.

2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, yourpower mains should be in a secure area.) See “Security” on page 181 for moreinformation.

System input powerThe following input power considerations apply to all system units. See “Rackconsiderations” on page 176 for additional information about power.

Electrical considerationsThese topics should be considered before you install a system.

Primary computer power serviceAlthough a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, thecomputer power panel should connect to feeders that do not serve other loads.Connect electrical noise-producing devices to panels separate from those feedingthe system units.


GroundingFor information about grounding your N series storage systems and storageexpansion units, see the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N seriesproducts.

To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding andreceptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes.

Computer room emergency power-off controlsAs a safety precaution, you should provide computer room emergency power-offcontrols for disconnecting the main service wiring that supplies the computerequipment. Install these controls at a convenient place for the operator and next tothe main exit doors of the room.

Lightning protectionYou should install lightning protection devices when in environments such asthese:v An overhead power service supplies the primary power.v The area is subject to electrical storms or equivalent-type power surges.

Three-phase powerIf your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensedelectrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced.

Thermal considerationsWhen installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system,should have front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, wherethe heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, whichfurther heats the air. Eventually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due tohigh temperature.


Floor-loading specificationsConsult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See“Hardware specifications” on page 132 for information on the N series storagesystem weight. See Appendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” onpage 195 for rack floor-loading specifications.

Floor plan considerationsYou need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. Thissection describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. Italso describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning.

Before you create your floor plan, consider these variables:v Flow of work and personnel within the areav Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit over a cutout in a

raised floorv Routing of cables and length of cablesv Location of safety equipmentv Future expansion

Creating a floor planIt is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipmentdoes not exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility

Cold aisleA

irco

nditi

oner

Hot aisle

back

front

back

back

front

Airflow

front2440 mm betweencenter lines of hotand cold aisle

Perforated tilesor gratings

1220 mm coldaisle width

Racks Nsip

g0

01

Racks

Racks

Airflow

Airflow

Figure 13. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration


supports. You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storagesystem. This section discusses floor planning considerations and how to create afloor plan. It also discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing yourfloor planning.

Note: You might need to prepare and analyze several plans before choosing a finalone. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than oneinstallation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage.

Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plansare appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan:v Service and operational clearances.v If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects that

might obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor.v If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider these

factors:– Placement of cables to minimize obstruction– Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between

N series storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from theceiling)

v Location of:– Power receptacles– Air conditioning equipment and controls– File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment– Room emergency power-off controls– All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars

v LAN and telephone connections.

When you finish the floor plan, review it to make sure that all cables to beconnected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the Nseries storage system has enough clearance.

SecurityIn forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N seriesstorage system secure. For security purposes, use these precautions:v Choose a trusted administrator.v Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies)

in a secure location.v Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location.



Chapter 5. Cable planning

Before ordering, the customer is asked to develop specific planning informationconcerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you planyour layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting thesystem units and devices.

You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not onlyyour current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation ofpersonnel.

To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on yourfloor plan.

The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnectingcables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary andshould contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required.

General considerationsIn preparing for cabling, consider the following:v Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that you

currently have and plan to use with the N series storage system must becompatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard isspecifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on thatadapter must be met.

v Lengths and paths of cables.v Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or

other sources of electrical interference.v Labeling of cables and ports you currently have in order to indicate which

devices you want attached to them.v Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patch

panels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching devices used incabling can allow ESD into the network.

Note: Lightning protection must be provided on any cable that travels outside ofthe building in which the system or devices are installed. Contact a cablingvendor about providing lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-opticcables do not require lightning protection.

The following cabling is required:1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution.2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors.

Note: EXN3000 and EXN3500 ACP cabling requires Category 6 or betterEthernet cables with RJ-45 connectors.

3. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports.4. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports.5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connector

on the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68–pin connector.


6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are available for N5000series and N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengthsand types:

Table 169. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables


2m Copper Cluster4X IB cable

2864, 2865 , 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4XIB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4XIB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1041

Copper-FiberConverter

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1042

Cable measuringAccurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Donot guess or estimate your cable lengths.

Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnectcables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodesin the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixedlengths.

For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following:1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cable

management tray, included with the N series storage system.2. Avoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to avoid crimping

cables.3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate.

Cable labelingCable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are:

Room The room number, or other information about thephysical location of the device.

Person The name of the person who uses the device.

Telephone # The nearest telephone number to the device.

Device type This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similardevice.

Device ID The device ID is determined when the software isconfigured on the system.

Software location code The software location code is the link between thehardware and software. This code appears in thesoftware configuration menus and in the hardwarediagnostic menus.


Note: For specific location code information, seethe Diagnostic Information manual for yoursystem.

Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a labelattached to the end of the adapter.

Note: Some of the adapters do not have an adaptertype.

Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and somenetwork adapters, generally includes the name ofthe interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or FibreChannel SAN.

EIA Used in a rack-type system unit to identify thephysical location of the drawer within the rack.The label along the right side of the rack (with rearcover open) indicates numbers from 1, at thebottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number atthe bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIAlocation for this drawer.

Slot Physical position within the system unit or drawerwhere the adapter is located. Each adapter slot isidentified by a single digit number. Usually, thenumber is embossed in the adapter mountingframe.

Connector Connector number on the adapter. Most adaptershave only one connector, so this number is 1.

Tailgate The number of the tailgate connector to which thiscable is attached if tailgates are used.

System ID If an installation has more than one system unit,each one must be identified to prevent connectingdevices to the wrong system unit. The customerdetermines the System ID.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 185


Chapter 6. AutoSupport

AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the DataONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems thatcontinuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on amultitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBMTechnical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate actionto correct potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storageenvironment is working at top efficiency. For more information on AutoSupport,go to the N series support website AutoSupport overview page athttps://www.ibm.com/support/entdocview.wss?uid=ssg1S7001625.

How does AutoSupport work?The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages toIBM Service and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notificationmessages to one or more customer-specified e-mail addresses which can alertrecipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary,IBM Service and Support will contact customers based on the contact informationin the customer’s record for resolution of potential system problems.

Note: After an occurrence of an event, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBMService and Support via HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefinedlocation specified in Data ONTAP.

AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP 7.1.1 or higher when youconfigure your N series storage system for the first time.

IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enablesthe IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back toIBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport canbe enabled via the command line interface via the following command:

options autosupport.enable on

AutoSupport can also be enabled via the FilerView web browser user interface byselecting Filer � Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand navigation frame, andthen selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to “AutoSupport Enabled.”

On later versions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when youconfigure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated.

Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enableoption, but you are strongly advised to leave it enabled.

Interaction with mail hostsN series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host atthe customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to thecustomer-specified e-mail addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one hostreachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP server or a mailforwarder, such as the sendmail program.


https://www.ibm.com/support/entdocview.wss?uid=ssg1S7001625

Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messagesThe subject line of the e-mail messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanismcontains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject alsocontains a relative prioritization of the message, using syslog severity levels fromDEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notificationshould be used to check on the problem being reported.

The format of the subject line is as follows:

System Notification from (message)

Short e-mail messages for urgent eventsCustomers can specify up to five addresses of e-mail recipients in which the Nseries storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reasonfor the alert to these recipients. The short e-mail messages contain the reason forthe notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages aretriggered only by specific urgent events. This feature is useful for systemadministrators who read e-mail messages on alphanumeric pagers.

Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messagesCustomers can specify up to five e-mail recipient addresses for standardAutoSupport notification.

Technical Support responseWhen IBM Technical Support receives an alert AutoSupport notification, it takescorrective action to resolve the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a caseand then contacts the customer to further investigate the situation or to provide acorrective action to the customer.

High-availability considerationsThe AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in ahigh-availability configuration are different from the AutoSupport notificationmessages from a standalone N series storage system in the following ways:v The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a high-availability

configuration contain information about the N series storage system's partner,such as the partner system ID and the partner host name.

v In takeover mode, if you reboot the live N series storage system, twoAutoSupport messages are sent to notify the e-mail recipients of the reboot. Thelive N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storagesystem sends the other message.

v The live N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after itcompletes the takeover process.


Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes

This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running fromyour N series storage system to the power source.

Recommended AC power line sizesLonger AC power feeds need to be properly designed to preserve voltage levels tothe equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, whichsupplies power to your N series storage system and storage expansion units, canoften exceed 50 feet.

Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable orceiling drop.

The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% voltage drop fora particular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer's Handbook).

Table 170. 110V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

110V,single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit

25 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG



Table 171. 220V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

220V,single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit




The following table lists the approximate equivalent wire gauge (American WireGauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage).

Table 172. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equivalents

AWG 8 10 12

Harmonized, mm-mm 1 4.0 2.5 1.5

1 mm-mm = millimeter squared



Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems

This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for Nseries products.

FRU/CRU list for N series productsFor the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, access the IBM Nseries support website, as described in “Websites” on page xxiv, and refer to theFRU (Field Replaceable Units) lists.

Power cord list for N series productsThe following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products.

FC 9000 (All countries)Power cord, Rack PDUv 27 inchesv Rated 250 V/15 Av Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13.

FC 9001 Europe and othersProvides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Bulgaria, Chile,Croatia, Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France,Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal,Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkeyv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9002 United Kingdom and othersProvides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana,Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lankav 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9003 JapanProvides power cords for Japanv 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.v Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for 100-110 V ac input.

FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m)Provides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador,El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines,Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuelav 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.v Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9005 Australia, New ZealandProvides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguayv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for 200-240 V ac input.


FC 9006 Switzerland, LiechtensteinProvides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtensteinv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9007 ArgentinaProvides power cords for Argentinav 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9008 ChinaProvides power cords for Chinav 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for 200-240 V ac

input.

FC 9009 DenmarkProvides power cords for Denmarkv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR 107-2-D1) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South AfricaProvides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africav 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9011 IsraelProvides power cords for Israelv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9012 ItalyProvides power cords for Italyv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9013 North America (250 V)Provides power cords for U.S.v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/15 A.v Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9014 BrazilProvides power cords for Brazilv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.v Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for 200-240 V ac input

FC 9015 TaiwanProvides 125 V power cords for Taiwanv 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.v Attached plug EL 302 (CNS 10917-3) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V)Provides 250 V power cords for Taiwanv 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.


v Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V acinput.

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems 193


Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks

This chapter provides requirements and specifications for 19" racks used by the Nseries storage system.

2101 Model N00 rack specificationsTable 173. IBM 2101 Model N00 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 1804 mm 71.0 in.Capacity 36 EIA UnitsWidth without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.Depth with front andrear door installed

1100 mm 43.3 in.

WeightBase rack 244 kg 535 lbsFull rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 200.

Electrical² (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack)AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)3

4.8

Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperaturerequirements

(see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 onpage 197). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)

1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to amaximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).

2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.

3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can beplugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps.

4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output andprovide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.


2101 Model N42 rack specificationsTable 174. IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 2105 mm 79.3 in.Capacity 42 EIA UnitsWidth without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.Depth with front andrear door installed

1100 mm 43.3 in.

WeightBase rack 216 kg 475 lbs (without PDUs and with standard doors and two side panels)Full rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 200.

Electrical² (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack)AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)3

4.8







Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 onpage 197). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)



3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can beplugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps.

4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output andprovide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

5. For information about the Rear Door Heat eXchanger (FC 6858), see the IBM Rear Door Heat eXchanger Planning Guide onwww.ibm.com/pc/support, or see the IBM Power Systems Site Preparation and Physical Planning Guide, SA76-0103, or the IBMStorage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Model N42, GC53-1174.


http://www.ibm.com/pc/support

7014 Rack specifications

Model T00 rackTable 175. IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 1804 mm 71.0 in.Capacity 36 EIA UnitsWith PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.Width without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.Depth with rear dooronly

1042 mm 41.0 in.

Depth with rear doorand RS/6000® style frontdoor

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured)style front door

1147 mm 45.2 in.

WeightBase rack 244 kg 535 lbsFull rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 200.

Electrical² (sum specified values fordrawers or enclosures in rack)

DC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA³

8.4

Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)⁴

4.8







Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5). Referto the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)



3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system beinstalled in a dc-only rack.

4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack.

5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat outputand provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

Appendix C. Rack Specifications 197

Model T42 RackTable 176. IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 2015 mm 79.3 in.Capacity 42 EIA UnitsWith PDP - DC only Not applicableWidth without side panels 623 mm 24.5 in.With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.Depth with rear door only 1042 mm 41.0 in.Depth with rear door and RS/6000 stylefront door

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured) style front door 1147 mm 45.2 in.

WeightBase rack 261 kg 575 lbsFull rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page

200.

Service clearance Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet.

All other specifications For all other technical information, see “Model T00 rack” on page 197.

T00 and T42 service clearances and caster locationThe service clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 14 on page 199:


Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Becausemaintenance activities require access at both the front and back, extra roomneeds to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doorson the I/O rack. The Figure 15 on page 200 shows the minimum spacerequired.

2474 mm (97.4 in.)

2921 mm(115 in.)915 mm

(36 in.)915 mm(36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

Front

CasterLocation

Front coverthickness58 mm (2.4 in.)

Rear coverthickness20 mm (0.8 in.)

Side coverthickness 2x10 mm (0.4 in.)

(4.8)121

(3.1)

80

Cable opening310 mm (12.2 in.)x 50 mm (2 in.)

Figure 14. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks.


T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement asshown above. A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trimpieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For service clearances, see the serviceclearances as shown in the table for the “Model T00 rack” on page 197.

T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loadingThe T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present.Table 177 shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00 and T42racks when it is loaded.

Table 177. T00 and T42 rack weight distribution

Rack Systemweight (1)

lbs (kg)

Width (2)in. (mm)

Depth (2)in. (mm)

Weight distribution distance (3)

Front & backin. (mm)

Left & rightin. (mm)

7014-T00(4)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 18.4 (467.4)

7014-T00(5)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 0.0 (0.0)

7014-T00(6)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 22 (559)

7014-T42(4)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 18.4 (467.4)

7014-T42(5)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 0.0 (0.0)

7014-T42(6)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 27 (686)

The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00and T42 racks when it is loaded.

Table 178. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications

Rack Floor loading

Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft2

7014-T00 (4) 366.7 322.7 75 66

7014-T00 (5) 734.5 690.6 150.4 141.4

7014-T00 (6) 341 297 70 61

7014-T42 (4) 403 359 82.5 73.5

Separation25.4 mm(1 in.)

T00or

T42Rack

T00or

T42Rack

Figure 15. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments


Table 178. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications (continued)

Rack Floor loading

Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft2

7014-T42 (5) 825 781 169 160

7014-T42 (6) 341.4 297.5 70 61

The following notes are for both of the preceding tables.

Notes:

1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg inparentheses.

2. For dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses.3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the

rack perimeter (minus covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond theperimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot overlap with adjacentcomputer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm inparentheses.

4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in thefigure plus cover thickness.

5. No left and right weight distribution distance.6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floor

loading objective.

Rack specificationsAll racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to thespecifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) andthe IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a fewfrom IBM do not.v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks.

The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.),and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) aparton center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the twofront-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mountingholes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.


The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holesspaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45 mm(1.75 in.) apart on center).

Rear, No Door

Front, No Door

571mm (22.50 in.)

203mm (8.0 in.)

719mm (28.31 in.)

51mm (2.01 in.)

451mm (17.76 in.)

494mm (19.45 in.)

Drawer Rail

Mounting Flanges494mm (19.45 in.)

Figure 16. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions


v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg (35lbs) of product weight per EIA unit.

Figure 17. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

450 +/- 0.75mm

Rack Front Opening

465 +/- 0.8mm

Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-CenterHole Diameter =

7.1 +/- 0.1mm

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

Bottom Front of Rack

EIA

Ho

leSp

ac

ing

Figure 18. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view


For example, a 4-EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg(140 lbs).

v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is stronglyrecommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the samespecifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Businstalled in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A.Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must meet the drawer powerrequirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connectedto the same power distribution device.The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must havea compatible plug type for your drawer or device.

Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUsthat are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible forensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumesresponsibility for any and all agency certifications required.

v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including asecure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinetrail support hole.

Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may berequired. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series railmounting kit included with every N series machine.

The rails provided with the N series storage system have been designed andtested to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails alsoprovide rear tie-down brackets.The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, TopView of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 16 on page 202).

v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in thefront and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack orcabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is installed or removed.Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securelybolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long andheavy row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014 or2101 and the individual drawer installation guides for additional information.

v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around therack or cabinet).The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the frontand rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, therear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearancein both the front and rear).If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provideunrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must be removedfor service, it is the customer's responsibility to remove them prior to service.

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can beopened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or2101 Rack Installation Guides and the individual drawer installation guides).


Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front,571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (seeFigure 16 on page 202).

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a frontdoor. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so thatthere is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambientinlet temperature between 10 °C and 40 °C (50 °F and 104 °F), with an ideal 22°C (72 °F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open areaper square inch.

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBMrack

v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power DistributionUnit (PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 Vac must be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL)for the country in which it will be installed.Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack orcabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fantrays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or anyother products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous voltage.Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the USA:– UL– ETL– CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:– UL (Ulc mark)– ETL (ETLc mark)– CSAThe European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration ofConformity (DOC).Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on theproduct or product label. However, proof of certification must be made availableto IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL licenseor certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTLmark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTLpublication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain themanufacturer's name, product type and model, standard to which it wascertified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, anda list of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer'sDeclaration is not proof of certification by an NRTL.

v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legalrequirements for the country in which it is installed.The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60 Vdc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or hotsurfaces).

v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for eachproduct in the rack, including any PDU.


A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if thepower cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is ofa detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switchon the rack, provided all power is removed from the rack or product by thedisconnect device.If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), therack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.

v The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in therack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU orrack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on theproducts installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicablecountry's electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be verifiedby your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed, and should beverified prior to the first service activity.

v The voltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible withthe products plugged into them.The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be atleast 1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. Thecurrent rating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of therating for the building supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC).Example: A PDU rating of 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of productratings does not exceed 9.6A.If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements asdescribed for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL).

v The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack orcabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and inaccordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack orcabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer'sproduct documentation and marketing literature).

v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, andall products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must beavailable on-site.

v If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must beclearly visible safety labels for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languagesrequired for the country in which the product is installed).

v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety orweight labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translatedinto the languages required for the country in which the product is installed.

v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definitionand must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metalenclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply.Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 orbetter. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If woodshelves are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listedflame-retardant coating.

v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for"safe to service" (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative if indoubt).There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.


Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installedbetween 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availabilityof an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder isrequired for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approvednonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with thelocal IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (12 ft) above thefloor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be serviced by IBMservice personnel.For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, theproducts and parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weighover 11.4 kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representative if indoubt).There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicingof any of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation PlanningRepresentative if in doubt).

v Any rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed, or haveanother means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping during productoperation or service.Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securelybolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long andheavy row of racks or cabinets.

v It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with theproduct be used to install it in the rack.The mounting rails that ship with IBM products have been designed and testedto safely support the product during operation and service activities. Themounting rails used on products to be serviced by IBM must be certified for usewith the products by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards.

Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times themaximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extendedfront and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic failure.



Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600.

Note: The N3300 does not support optional adapter cards.

Table 179. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical)

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe)

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1060 Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter

1062 Single-port 10-Gbps NIC

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical)

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one.For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, seethe IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275musing 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapterhas two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100m usingCategory 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000).The FC ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-styleconnectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 180. Dual-port 4 Gbps FC HBA for disk - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre62.5 micron multi-modefibre

1 Gbps 500m 300m

2 Gbps 300m 150m

4 Gbps 150m 70m


Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. Thisadapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 181. Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape - maximum cable lengths


1 Gbps 500m 300m

2 Gbps 300m 150m

4 Gbps 150m 70m


This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSIhosts.



Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has fourRJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides twoEthernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment(FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) and tapedevices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 182. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths


1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters



The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe following cable lengths:

Table 183. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths



Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 211

Table 183. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths (continued)





Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.


Note: Feature code 1033 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1 or higher.

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036)Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.

This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports. It is not used forattaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.

This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. Thisadapter supports the following cable lengths:

Table 184. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber62.5 micron multi-modefiber






Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060)Feature code 1060 is a PCIe adapter with two SAS ports for connecting SAS-basedstorage (EXN3000 and EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapteroperates at 3 Gbps.




Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062)Feature code 1062 is a PCIe adapter with one 10-Gb Ethernet port for connectingthe N series controller to 10-Gb Ethernet networks.



Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical)(FC 1063)

Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPsplugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables.



Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper)(FC 1064)

Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cageconnectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs.



Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 213


Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 andN5500 systems

The N5200 and N5500 support a variety of optional adapter cards.

Table 185. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 models

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1003 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)

1004 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1005 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment

1006 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateways andMetroCluster filer configurations)

1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) (optical)

1009 Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper)

1010 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1011 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter

1018 Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)

1019 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1020 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1027 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBANote: FC 1034 is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running DataONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is notsupported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x orData ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN5200 and N5500:1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1018, 1019,

1027, and 1034)2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011)3. Ethernet Network Interface Cards (FC 1003, 1007, 1008, 1009, and 1020)4. SCSI Dual-channel Ultra320 LVD adapter for tape attachment (FC 1016)

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, seethe IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003)Feature code 1003 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet network interface card. Theadapter supports 10000BASE-SX network topologies. The adapter has two LCduplex connectors and supports 50- micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre(MMF). The maximum cable distance is 550 meters using 50-micron MMF and 275m using 62.5-micron MMF.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapteris six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 3, 4and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority for this adapter isslots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004)Feature code 1004 is a dual-port 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA interface for diskstorage expansion unit (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) attachment. FC 1004 isused on all models of the N5200 and N5500 filers (A10 and A20) for attachingEXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 disk storage expansion units.

This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50-micron or62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 186.

Table 186. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) - maximum cablelengths




For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (A10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter isslots 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20), the slot priority order for installingthis adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005)Feature code 1005 is a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA interface for tape connectivity.This adapter is a 64-bit 133MHx 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter. It auto-negotiatesto 2 and 1 Gbps. The adapter has two LC style connectors and supports 50-micronand 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre.

This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 187.

Table 187. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) - maximum cablelengths






For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 4, 3 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the slot priority order forthis adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway andMetroCluster filer) (FC 1006)

Feature code 1006 is a 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment. Thisadapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50 micron or 62.5 micronmulti-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 188

Table 188. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroClusterfiler) (FC 1006) - maximum cable lengths




This adapter is used for two purposes:v On N5200 and N5500 gateways (G10 and G20), this adapter is used for attaching

N5200 or N5500 storage controllers directly to back-end disk systems or to FibreChannel switches, which are then connected to back-end disk systems.

v In a fabric MetroCluster environment, this adapter is used for attachingdual-node N5200 and N5500 filer models (A20) to the Fibre Channel switchesthat are used in a fabric MetroCluster configuration. In a fabric MetroClusterconfiguration, FC 1018 (Dual-port MetroCluster HBA) is also required.

For single-node models (G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2,3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installingthis adapter is 2, 1, and 4.

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T networktopologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cabledistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair(UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter istwo. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter isfour.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order forthis adapter is slots 1, 2, and 4.

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 217

Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008)Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. It supports a maximum distanceof 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order forthis adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009)Feature code 1009 is a four-port gigabit Ethernet network interface card thatprovides full TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) capability and iSCSI acceleration. TheTOE function includes TCP and UDP checksum offload and large send offload. TheiSCSI acceleration includes header and data digest (CRC) generation andverification.

This gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T) PCI-X TOE feature provides four RJ-45connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, orbetter, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order forthis adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two copper RJ-45 connections.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two optical LC duplex connectors.



For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016)Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adaptercontains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) andtwo 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers areonly expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tapedevices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one ateach end.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapteris six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 4, 3, and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)(FC 1018)

Feature code 1018 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is requiredby MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP Version 7.2.3 or higher.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019)Feature code 1019 is a PCI-X dual-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional FCP target ports; it may not beused to attach storage expansion units. FCP target ports are used by applicationservers on a Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) for performing I/O toLUNs on the N5200 or N5500 using Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). Itauto-negotiates to speeds of 1, 2, or 4 Gbps.

Two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengthsshown in Table 189 on page 220.


Table 189. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) - Maximum cable lengths





For a single-node model (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter istwo. For a dual-node model (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapteris four.

For single-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3,4 and 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter isslots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020)Feature code 1020 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. It supports 10BASE-T,100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T network topologies. The adapter provides two RJ-45connections and supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters using Category 5or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027)Feature code 1027 is a quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA). Itauto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. It may only be used for attaching storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports onthis adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has four small form factor (SFP) multi-mode optics with LC styleconnectors. It supports the cable lengths shown in Table 190

Table 190. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1027) - Maximumcable lengths





For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupiedby the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order forthis adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1,4.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. Fordual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupiedby the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order forthis adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1and 4.

Note: This feature is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running DataONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supportedfor N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP8.x 7-Mode.



Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 andN5600 systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N5300 and N5600.

Table 191. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

Featurecode Feature code description Supported platform

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N5300, N5600

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskattachment

N5300, N5600

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tapeattachment

N5300, N5600

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N5300, N5600

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) N5300, N5600

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tapeattachment

N5300, N5600

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter(PCIe)

N5300, N5600

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N5300, N5600

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 modelsonly)

N5300, N5600

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N5300, N5600

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape anddisk attachment

N5300, N5600

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N5300, N5600

1056 16-GB Performance Accelerator Module (PAM) N5300, N5600

1058 256-GB Flash Cache moduleNote: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred toas Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II.

N5600

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N5300, N5600

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) TargetAdapter (optical)

N5300, N5600

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) TargetAdapter (copper)

N5300, N5600

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N5300, N5600

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN5300 and N5600:1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029,

1035, 1061)2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033)


3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,1058)

4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1063, 1064, 1065)5. Network Interface cards (1012, 1013, 1023, 1031)6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1035)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed three.For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed six.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of thisadapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximumnumber of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied bythe NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapterhas two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters usingCategory 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The FibreChannel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-styleconnectors. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 192on page 225.


Table 192. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cablelengths







Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. Thisadapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 193.

Table 193. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cablelengths








Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storageexpansion units (EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s).

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. Thisadapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 194 on page 226.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 225








Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of thisadapter is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximumnumber of this adapter is six.





Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.




Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape or diskstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storagecontrollers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe cable lengths shown in Table 195.

Table 195. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapteris three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of thisadapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priorityorder is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Support and cabling rules for the HBAThis HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. Itsupports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loopmixing restrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries.You can mix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape deviceson the same HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, asdescribed in the table below.

The following are not supported by these HBAs:v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBAv Gateway systemsv HBA target mode

Cabling rules for stand-alone controllersThe following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.

Ports A and B Ports C and D

N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units

N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices

Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units

Tape/library devices Tape/library devices


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe cable lengths shown in Table 196.






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10) the maximum number of thisadapter is three . For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20) the maximumnumber of this adapter is six.



Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides dualLC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.



Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or higher.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is requiredby MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2868/2869-A20/G20), two of these adaptercards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).






Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied bythe NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment(FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and diskstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storagecontrollers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe cable lengths shown in Table 197.

Table 197. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -maximum cable lengths






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapteris three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of thisadapter is six.


Support and cabling rules for the HBAThis HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. Itsupports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loopmixing restrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries.You can mix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape deviceson the same HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, asdescribed in the table below.

The following are not supported by these HBAs:v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBAv Gateway systems


v HBA target mode

Cabling rules for stand-alone controllersThe following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.

Ports A and B Ports C and D

N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units

N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices

Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units

Tape/library devices Tape/library devices









For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-nodeconfiguration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.

Use of the 16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is one.For the dual-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is two.

For the single-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is two.For the dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four.


This adapter is a PCIe adapter.

For the N5300: For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priorityorder is 4, 2.

For the N5600: For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 4, 2. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 4.

256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generationof PCIe caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augmentthe system's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations.The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacityinstead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in someenvironments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more informationabout Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cachemodule or PAM,” on page 277.

Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cache modulesoftware feature.

Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance AccelerationModules (PAM) II.

FC 1058 is not supported for N5300 models.

For the single-node N5600 models, the maximum number of this adapter is two.For the dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 2.


Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061)Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N seriesSAS-based storage (EXN3000 and EXN3500) behind the N series controller. TheSAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps.


For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. Fordual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 2, 1, 4.




Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPsplugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables.





Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cageconnectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs.




Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature that provides dualLC duplex connectors. The adapter has dual bare-cage connectors that requirepurchasing and inserting FC 2012 (10 GbE SFP+ optic module) to connect to LCcables. Alternatively, you can use FC 1053/1054/1055 copper cables, whereappropriate, which have integral SFPs.

FC 1065 supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm)multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable feature 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047) can optionally be orderedwith this feature.





Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6000 series systems.

Table 199. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported systems

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N6070

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070


N6040, N6060, N6070


N6040, N6060, N6070

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N6070

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070

1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070

1028 Quad-port copper GbE NIC N6040, N6060, N6070

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskand tape attachment

N6040, N6060, N6070

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N6040, N6060, N6070

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21/A22models only)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tapeand disk attachment

N6040, N6060, N6070

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1056 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N6040, N6060, N6070

1057 512-GB Flash Cache moduleNote: Flash Cache modules were formerlyreferred to as Performance Acceleration Modules(PAM) II.

N6070


N6040, N6060

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N6040, N6060, N6070

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (optical)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (copper)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N6040, N6060, N6070

1070 256-GB Flash Cache II module N6040, N6060


Table 199. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems (continued)

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported systems

1071 512-GB Flash Cache II module N6070

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN6000 series system:1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029,

1035, 1061)2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033)3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAMs) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,

1057, 1058, 1070, 1071)4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064,

1065)5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1023, 1028, 1031)6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1029)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed four.For the dual-node (active/active or high availability) models, the total number ofPCIe adapters cannot exceed eight.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapterhas two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters usingCategory 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.




Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP targetports.









Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.










Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 235

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storageexpansion units.







For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.


Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.






Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.




Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028)Feature code 1028 is a 4-port copper GbE Network Interface Card (NIC).

This 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-t, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe featureprovides four RJ45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 metersusing Cat. 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. Ethernetcables are provided by the customer.

The maximum number allowed for this adapter is: Models A10 and A11–four.Models A20 and A21–eight. The total number of all adapter features is four forModels A10 and A11, eight for Models A11 and A21.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment(FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) and tapedevices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 203. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths








Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe following cable lengths:






Table 204. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths (continued)



For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight.






Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032)Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is requiredby MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).



For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment(FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape andsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connectionsof 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:







Note: This adapter is not supported for N6000 series MetroCluster configurationsor filers with gateway features.














16 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing aFlash Cache module or PAM,” on page 277.

Use of the 16 GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for theN6070 and two for the N6040 or N6060. For the dual-node model, the maximumnumber of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations,the slot priority order is 1, 2. 3. 4.


512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generationof caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment thesystem's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. Thedesign allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead ofperformance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments andhelping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cachecards, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,” onpage 277.



For the single-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For thedual-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations,the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4.


256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generationof caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment thesystem's onboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. Thedesign allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead ofperformance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and


helping to improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cachemodules, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,”on page 277.



For the single-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For thedual-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is two.









Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks.





Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks.





Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LCduplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable(FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC(FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 areLC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables.




256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070)Feature code 1070, a 256-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIeFlash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system'sonboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The designallows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead ofperformance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments andhelping improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cachemodules, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,”on page 277.

Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) requires the Flash Cachemodule software feature.


For the single-node N6040 Model A10 and N6060 Model A12, the maximumnumber of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6040 Model A20 and N6060Model A22, the maximum number of this adapter is four.


Note: Feature code 1070 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.5 or higher or Data ONTAP8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.






This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations,the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4.

Note: Feature code 1071 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.5 or higher or Data ONTAP8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.



Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6200 series systems.

Table 207. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported models

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) All N6200 series models


All N6200 series models



1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) All N6200 series models

1028 Quad-port copper GbE NIC All N6200 series models

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskattachment


1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1057 512-GB Flash Cache module N6240 and N6270 only

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter All N6200 series models





1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC All N6200 series models

1066 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA N6210-C20, N6240-E21 andN6270-E22 only

1067 8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA All N6200 series models

1070 Flash Cache II 256 GB N6210 and N6240 models

1071 Flash Cache II 512 GB N6240 and N6270 models

1072 Flash Cache II 1 TB N6270

1078 Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP+ N6210, N6240, and N6270models

2014 SFP+ optical module for 1078 N6210, N6240, and N6270models

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN6200 series system:1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029,

1061)2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1066, 1067)3. Flash Cache II modules (1057, 1070, 1071, 1072)


|

|

4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065)5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1028, 1078)6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015)

For model C10, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two.

For models C20, C21 and C22, the total number cannot exceed four.

For models E11 and E12, the total number cannot exceed six.

For models E21 and E22, the total number cannot exceed twelve.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, referto the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMFmedia.

For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number ofthis adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The maximum number ofthis adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP targetports.










|

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This feature code includes a50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The FibreChannel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.








Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is notused for attaching N series storage expansion units.

Note: All FC target ports must be either onboard FC ports or FC HBA ports (usingFC 1017); they may not be used in combination.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFFmulti-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the followingmaximum cable lengths.








Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 247






For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapteris two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six percontroller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.

Note: Data ONTAP 7.3.5 supports a maximum of five of this feature on ModelE11, ten on Model E21. To use the maximums of six and 12 requires DataONTAP 7.3.6 or 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N seriesstorage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the following cable lengths:

Table 211. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximumcable lengths
















For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: For systems running DataONTAP 7.3.5, the maximum number of this adapter is four per controller module.For systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.1 and later, the maximum number of thisadapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.


This adapter is only used to provide additional target ports. It is not used forattaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.










512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. Feature code 1057 is only supported for the N6240and N6270.

The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed forN series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improvingperformance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system tobe sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need forexcess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization.For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, “Installing orreplacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,” on page 277.


For all models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module.

For N6240-C21 and N6270-C22: The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The slot priority order is 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061)Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N seriesSAS-based storage behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3Gbps.












Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a dual-port 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature thatprovides two SFP+ ports on the adapter.

To use optical LC fiber optic cables, one SFP+ optical module (FC 2012) is requiredfor each optical port. To connect to a switch using copper SFP+ cables, use one FC1055 per port (each feature provides one passive, copper, SFP+ cable).



8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066)FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster licensefunction feature and compatible switches. It provides the connection heartbeat forthe cluster over a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a FabricMetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroClusterinstallations.

FC 1066 is supported only for the N6210-C20, N6240-E21 and N6270-E22 models.

For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter isone per controller node.

8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067)FC 1067 provides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror over FibreChannel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror.

For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter isone per controller module. The slot priority is 2.


Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) requires the Flash Cachemodule software feature.



The maximum number of this adapter for the N6210-C10 is one and for theN6210-C20, two. The slot priority order is 1.

The maximum number of this adapter for the N6240-C21 is four. The slot priorityorder is 2.

The maximum number of this adapter for the N6240-E11 is two, and for theN6240-E21, four. The slot priority order is 2.

Note: Feature code 1070 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.5 or 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.




The maximum number of this module for the N6240-C21 is two. The slot priorityorder is 1.

The maximum number of this module for the N6240-E11 is one, and for theN6240-E21, two. The slot priority order is 1.

The maximum number of this module for the N6270-E12 is two, and for theN6270-E22, four. The slot priority order is 2.


1-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072)Feature code 1072, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIeFlash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system'sonboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The designallows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead ofperformance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments andhelping improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cachemodules, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,”on page 277.

Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1072) requires the Flash Cache modulesoftware feature.



The maximum number of this module for the N6270-E12 is one, and for theN6270-C22 and N6270-E22, two. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB percontroller. The slot priority order is 1.

Note: Feature code 1072 requires Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.

2-Port 10-GbE NIC (FC 1078)This feature provides two 10 gigabit Ethernet connections for network connectivity.This adapter uses SFP+ modules for optical connections (FC 2014), or SFP+embedded copper cables for copper networks.

Note: If this feature is used to connect to a network via optical fiber cables, featureSFP+ Optical mod. for FC 1078, FC 2014 is required. If this feature is used toconnect to a network via copper cable, customer-supplied twinax cables arerequired.

The maximum number of this module for the N6210-C10 is one, N62x0-C2x is two,N62x0-E1x is six, and N62x0-E2x is twelve. The slot priority order for C modelswould be 1,2 and the slot priority for E models would be 1,2,3,4,5,6.

Note: Feature code 1078 requires Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode or later.

SFP+ Optical mod. for 1078 (FC 2014)This feature converts the standard copper SFP+ ports on FC 1078 to optical,allowing use of optical Ethernet infrastructures.

Each FC 1078 adapter supports a maximum of 2 of these for optical connections.

Note: This feature is a corequisite of FC 1078 if FC 1078 is used with fiber opticcabling.


|

|||

||||

|||

|

|

||

|

||


Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 seriessystems

IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN7000 series models:1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units or disk systems (FC

1014, 1029, 1035, 1061)2. Storage adapters for mirroring and MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033

and 1034)3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,

1057, 1071)4. Storage adapter for host block access (FC 1010, 1011, 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030,

1036, 1063, 1064, 1065)5. Network Interface cards (FC 1007, 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031)6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1016, 1015, 1029. 1035)

PCI-X AdaptersN7000 series models support the following PCI-X adapters.

Table 214. Optional PCI-X Adapters

Feature Code Feature Code Description Models Supported

1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE(optical)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1009 Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper) N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1010 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI targetadapter (copper)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1011 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI targetadapter (optical)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBANote: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 seriessystems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higherversions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supportedfor N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.xor Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed three.For dual-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed six. Fordual-node models, adapters must be ordered in pairs, one for each node.


Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T networktopologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cabledistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair(UTP) media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is 9, 3, 4.


Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008)Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports amaximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre(MMF) media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOEadapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009)Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. Theadapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximumdistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP)four-pair media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOEadapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two copper RJ-45 connections.




Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two optical LC duplex connectors.



SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016)Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adaptercontains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) andtwo 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers areonly expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tapedevices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one ateach end.

For the single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For thedual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six.


SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.



Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

PCI-Express (PCIe) adaptersN7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters.

Table 215. Optional PCIe adapters

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Models Supported

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 257

Table 215. Optional PCIe adapters (continued)

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Models Supported


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter(copper)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1028 Quad-port Copper GbE NIC N7900

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk ortape attachment

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21 modelsonly)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tapeand disk attachment

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1056 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target adapter (optical)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target adapter (copper)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1071 512-GB Flash Cache II module N7900

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed five.For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275musing 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7,8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapterhas two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters usingCategory 5 or better UTP four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC1014)

Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000).The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.










Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC1015)

Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.









This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LCconnectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storageexpansion units.







For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.



Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSIhosts.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is five. Fordual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.


Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and1000Base-T) PCIe feature that provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximumsupported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twistedpair (UTP) four-pair media.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC1026)

Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides twoEthernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.





The maximum number of this adapter for the N7900-A11 is six, and for theN7900-A21, twelve.. The slot priority order is 1, 2.

Note: Data ONTAP 7.3.5 supports a maximum of five of this feature on ModelA11, ten on Model A21. To use the maximums of six and 12 requires DataONTAP 7.3.6 or 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher.



Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tapeattachment (FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) or tape devicesto N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LCconnectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 219. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths







This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC1030)

Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe following cable lengths:






For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.








Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC1032)

Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is requiredby MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2866/2867-A20/A21), two of these adaptercards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).





This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-nodeconfiguration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and diskattachment (FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape andsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) toN series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LCconnectors support the following cable lengths:








Note: This adapter is not supported for N7000 series MetroCluster configurationsor filers with gateway features.


This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC1036)

Feature code 1036 is a PCIe dual-port 8-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units or backend gateway storage. It auto-negotiatesconnections of 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, 4 Gbps, or 8 Gbps.

Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cablelengths:

Table 222. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) - maximumcable lengths






This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1, or higher.




16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing aFlash Cache module or PAM,” on page 277.

Use of the 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for theN7600 and N7700 and five for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, themaximum number of this adapter is eight for the N7600 and N7700 and ten for theN7800 and N7900.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and8.

For all models of the N7600 and N7700: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8.

For single-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7,8 and 1.

For dual-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8and 2.

512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. It is designed to augment the system's onboardmemory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows theN series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance,reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping toimprove capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, seeAppendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,” on page 277.

Use of the 512 GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache modulesoftware feature.


For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two for theN7600 and N7700 and four for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, themaximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and eight forthe N7800 and N7900.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8.

Notes:

1. For the N7600, N7700 and N7900, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.2or higher.

2. For the N7800, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.3 or higher.



For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. Fordual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten.



Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter(optical) (FC 1063)





Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter(copper) (FC 1064)





Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LCduplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable(FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC(FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 areLC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables.







For the N7900 single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.For the N7900 dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8.




Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50Tseries systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N7x50T series systems.

Table 223. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported models

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N7950T


N7950T


N7950T

1028 Quad-port copper GbE NIC N7950T

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskattachment

N7950T

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7950T

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7950T

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N7950T


N7950T


N7950T

1066 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA N7950T

1067 8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N7950T

1071 Flash Cache II 512 GB N7950T

1072 Flash Cache II 1-TB N7950T

1078 Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ N7950T

1079 Quad-port 8-Gbps FC HBA N7950T

1080 Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA N7950T

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into theN7x50T series system, from top to bottom:1. Fabric MetroCluster adapter (FC 1066)2. High performance network and block access adapters (FC 1036, 1063, 1064,

1067, 1078)3. Vertical adapters (FC 1079, 1080)4. Flash Cache II modules (FC 1071, 1072)5. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029,

1061)6. Standard performance block access adapters (FC 1012, 1028)7. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015)

There are two available vertical expansion slots and four PCIe expansion slots percontroller node on the N7x50T storage systems. The N7x50T also includes one I/O


expansion module per controller node; each I/O expansion module provides twoadditional vertical slots and eight PCIe slots, which means a total of 4 availablevertical slots and twelve PCIe slots for adapter expansion per node. One verticalslot per controller is occupied by the NVRAM card and the other three verticalslots are reserved for features 1079 and 1080.

Any and all adapter cards (hardware features) added to an N7950T configurationmust be added in equal numbers to the two nodes of the N7950T. The two nodesmust be identically configured.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, referto the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMFmedia.

The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15,9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000). TheFibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.








Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The FibreChannel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.











Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000) to N series storagecontrollers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe following cable lengths:

Table 226. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximumcable lengths








Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems 271








This adapter is only used to provide additional target ports. It is not used forattaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, 4-Gbps, or 8-Gbps.







8 Gbps 50 meters (OM2 21 meters

8 Gbps 150 meters (OM3)


Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061)Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N seriesSAS-based storage (EXN3000 or EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SASadapter operates at 3 or 6 Gbps.

The maximum number of this adapter is 12. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12.


Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments, supportingFibre Channel over Ethernet, iSCSI, NFS, and CIFS with FCoE-enabled hosts. Thisadapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks.


The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The maximum number of Ethernetports on all cards is 48. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.


Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments, supportingFibre Channel over Ethernet, iSCSI, NFS, and CIFS with FCoE-enabled hosts. Thisadapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks.

The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The maximum number of Ethernetports on all cards is 48. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.

8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066)FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster licensefunction feature and compatible switches. It provides the connection heartbeat forthe cluster over a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a FabricMetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroClusterinstallations.

The maximum number of this adapter is 2. The slot priority order is 2.

8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067)FC 1067 provides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror over FibreChannel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror.

The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15,9, 14, 8, 4, 16, 10.



For the N7950T Model E22, the maximum number of this module is 24. Themaximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13,7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.



1-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072)Feature code 1072, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIeFlash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system'sonboard memory, improving performance with some configurations. The designallows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead ofperformance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments andhelping improve capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cachemodules, see Appendix K, “Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM,”on page 277.

Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1072) requires the Flash Cache modulesoftware feature.

For the N7950T Model E22, the maximum number of this module is 16. Themaximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13,7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.


Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ (FC 1078)Feature code 1078, a dual-port 10 GbE NIC provides two 10 gigabit Ethernetconnections for network connectivity. This adapter uses SFP+ modules for opticalconnections (feature #2014), or SFP+ embedded copper cables for copper networks.

Note: If this feature is used to connect to a network via optical fiber cables, featureSFP+ Optical module, FC 2014, is required. If this feature is used to connectto a network via copper cable, customer-supplied twinax cables are required.The maximum number of Ethernet ports on the system is 48.

The maximum number of this module is 16. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15,9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10.

Quad-port 8 Gbps FC HBA (FC 1079)Feature code 1079, a 4-port 8 Gbps FC HBA provides four, 8 gigabit fibre channelports to expand the basic connectivity of the N series controller. These ports areused to connect to fibre channel expansion units (EXN1000 or EXN4000). Theseadapters use reserved slots, and do not apply to the maximum of 24 adapters.

Note: Note: At least one of either FC 1079 or 1080 must be ordered with theN7950T.

The maximum number of this module is 6. No more than six FC 1079 and 1080 aresupported. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12.

Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA (FC 1080)Feature code 1079, a 4-port 6 Gbps SAS HBA provides four, 6 gigabit serialattached SCSI (SAS) ports to expand the basic connectivity of the N seriescontroller. These ports are used to connect to the SAS expansion units (EXN3000 orEXN3500).

Note: Note: At least one of either FC 1079 or 1080 must be ordered with theN7950T.


The maximum number of this module is 6. No more than six FC 1079 and 1080 aresupported. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12.



Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module orPAM

You can install the caching modules—256-GB, 512-GB, and 1-TB Flash Cachemodules and 16-GB performance acceleration modules (PAMs)—in an existingstorage system as a first-time installation, as an addition to a storage system thatalready has caching modules, as an upgrade from PAMs to Flash Cache modules,or as replacements when a caching module is no longer functioning.

Notes:

1. Flash Cache modules (256-GB or 512-GB) were previously referred to as PAM IImodules.

2. This appendix provides Flash Cache module and PAM information for all Nseries systems. Some content in this appendix may not apply to your N seriessystem platform. Refer to the appropriate "Optional adapter cards" appendixfor your N series system for details about caching module support.

After installing a new or replacement caching module, you should run diagnostics.Depending on your platform model, you use the SYSDIAG tool or system-leveldiagnostics to run diagnostics.v You use the SYSDIAG tool to run diagnostics on platforms older than N6200

series and N7x50T series.

Note: If you have a N7900 system, the system must be running the SYSDIAGtool version 5.6 or higher:– You can see what version of the SYSDIAG tool your system is running

by entering the version -b command at the storage controller console.– You can update the SYSDIAG tool version by going to the N series

support website to download the service image atwww.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/.

v You use system-level diagnostics to run diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50Tseries platforms.

For information about the PAM and Flash Cache module LEDs, see the IBM SystemStorage N series Platform Monitoring Guide or the flyer that shipped with your PAMor Flash Cache module.

Installing or replacing a caching moduleInstalling or replacing a caching module involves shutting down and opening yoursystem, removing a failed module if applicable, installing the new module, andrunning diagnostics. If you are installing a caching module for the first time orupgrading PAMs to Flash Cache modules, you must also enable the softwarelicense and configure options.

For the latest information about supported versions of Data ONTAP, supportedstorage systems, and slot assignments for your caching module, see theappropriate section of this document, the N series Introduction and Planning Guide orthe Hardware and Service Guide for your N series system, and the N series support



website product publications matrices. The latest versions of these documents areavailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and navigated asdescribed in “Websites” on page xxiv

Before you beginYour system must meet certain criteria depending on your situation. If your systemdoes not meet these criteria, you should contact technical support.v You must check the appropriate hardware and service guide and the N series

support site at www.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/ to determine thefollowing for both first-time and additional caching module installations.

– The caching module is supported on the system that you have selected forthe installation.

– Your system is running a version of Data ONTAP that supports the cachingmodule you are installing.

– The PCIe slots that are supported for your particular system and cachingmodule card, and that an appropriate PCIe slot is available for each cachingmodule you are installing.

– When installing additional caching modules that are a different type than arecurrently installed, you must verify that your system supports the mixedcaching module types. For example, some storage systems may supportmixing 256-GB, 512-GB, and 1-TB Flash Cache modules.

Note: You cannot mix PAMs (16-GB modules) with Flash Cache modules.v For dual-node high-availability (HA) pairs, you must install an equal number of

caching modules in each node.v You must have a valid caching module license key to complete the caching

module installation. IBM provides your license key on the printed IBM SystemStorage N series Function Authorization form that you received from IBM withyour software offering order. If you do not have the Function Authorizationform, contact the IBM Manufacturing Quality Hotline.

v When upgrading 16-GB PAMs to Flash Cache modules, you must havepurchased the WAFL external software license that supports Flash Cachemodules.

Note: There are two different WAFL external software licenses. One is used withPAMs, and one is used with Flash Cache modules.

v All other components in the system must be functioning properly. If not, youshould contact technical support prior to attempting to install a caching module.

Installing or replacing a caching moduleInstalling or replacing a caching module involves opening your system, runningdiagnostics, and if installing a caching module for the first-time or upgrading toFlash Cache modules, enabling the software license and configuration options.Refer to the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system for detailedinstructions about shutting down, opening, and closing your system to access thePCIe slots, and instructions for rebooting your system. These guides also containinstructions about removing and installing a PCIe card.

Note: Steps 1 – 5 below present a general sequence of steps for all platforms. Referto your specific system Hardware and Service Guide for platform-specificdetails.



Attention: This procedure is disruptive for single-controller configurations, and isrecommended to be performed on single-controller configurations only during amaintenance window. For active/active or high availability configurations, this is anondisruptive procedure..1. Shut down the controller in which you are replacing or adding a caching

module.Attention: An HA pair with two controllers in a chassis must have the powersupplies kept on. An HA pair with one controller in a chassis must have thepower supplies in the target node turned off. Stand-alone configurations musthave the power supplies turned off. Power supplies that are turned off mustalso be unplugged from the power sources

If your system is... Then enter...

An HA pair running 7-Mode From the partner node console: cf takeover

A stand-alone configuration running 7-Mode At the system console: halt

2. Open your system.3. Remove the failed caching module (if necessary).

Refer to “Replacing PCI Cards and Risers” or “Replacing PCI adapters”sections in the Hardware and Service Guide for your platform.

4. Install the new caching module.

Note: If you are installing a PAM, the DRAM arrangement on the PAM you areinstalling might look different than the DRAM arrangement on the onein your system. The difference is because of DRAM technology, but themodule functionality is the same and the modules are compatible.

5. Close and reboot your system.6. Press Ctrl+C to stop the boot process and get to the Loader prompt.7. Run diagnostics on the new caching module, using the applicable instructions

in “Running diagnostics.” After you finish running diagnostics, return here tocomplete the next step.

8. Go to “Completing the replacement process” on page 282.

Running diagnosticsAfter installing a new or replacement caching module, run the appropriatediagnostics. Depending on your platform model, you use system-level diagnosticsor the SYSDIAG tool or to run diagnostics.

For N6200 series and N7x50T systems, see “Running system-level diagnostics.”

For all other N series systems, see “Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics” on page281.

Running system-level diagnosticsYou use the system-level diagnostics procedure to run diagnostics on N6200 seriesand N7x50T platforms. If you are running diagnostics on earlier platforms, youmust use the SYSDIAG tool (see “Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics” on page281).

Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM 279

About this taskYou can stop the diagnostics test at any time without harm to the system byentering the sldiag device stop command.

For additional information about system-level diagnostics, see the IBM SystemStorage N series System-Level Diagnostics Guide on the N series support website atwww.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/.

ProcedureComplete the following steps to run diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50Tplatforms. .1. Enter the following command at the Loader prompt: boot_diags

Attention: If you have a N6200 series system, during the boot_diags process,you must answer y to the following question before the system will boot toMaintenance mode:WARNING: System id mismatch. This usually occurs when replacing CF or NVRAM cards!Override system ID? {y/n} [n]y

Note: You must run this command from the Loader prompt for system-leveldiagnostics to function properly. The boot_diags command starts driversdesigned specifically for system-level diagnostics.

The Maintenance mode prompt (*>) appears. The remaining commands in thisprocedure are done in Maintenance mode except where specified otherwise.

2. Enter the following command:sldiag For details about the sldiag command,see the sldiag man page.

3. Run the test for the Flash Cache module you installed by entering theapplicable command:

If your system is running... Then enter...

Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher sldiag device run -dev fcache

A version of Data ONTAP prior to 8.0.27-Mode

sldiag device run -dev pam2

4. Verify that no hardware problems resulted from the addition or replacement ofhardware components on your system by entering the applicable command:

If your system is running... Then enter...

Data ONTAP 8.0.2 7-Mode or higher sldiag device status -dev fcache -long-state failed

A version of Data ONTAP prior to 8.0.27-Mode

sldiag device status -dev pam2 -long-state failed

If there are hardware problems, the prompt is followed by the status of the testfailures. If there are no hardware problems, only the prompt is displayed.

5. Proceed based on the results of the tests.



If the system-level diagnostics tests... Then...

Were completed without any failures Return your system to normal operation.

v Clear the status logs by entering the followingcommand: sldiag device clearstatus

v Verify that the log is cleared by entering the followingcommand: sldiag device status The followingdefault response is displayed: SLDIAG: No logmessages are present.

v Exit Maintenance mode by entering the followingcommand:halt.

v Reboot the storage system by entering the followingcommand at the firmware prompt: boot

v If your system is in an HA pair , run the cf givebackcommand.

Resulted in some failures Determine the cause of the problem.

v Exit Maintenance mode by entering the followingcommand: halt

v Perform a clean shutdown and disconnect the powersupplies.

v Verify that cables are securely connected, and thathardware components are properly installed in thestorage system.

v Reconnect the power supplies and power on thestorage system.

v Rerun the system-level diagnostics tests.

6. When the system-level diagnostics tests are successful, you have completedsystem-level diagnostics, go to the “Completing the replacement process” onpage 282, to finish.

Running SYSDIAG tool diagnosticsYou use the SYSDIAG tool to run diagnostics on platforms earlier than N6200series and N7x50T series. If you are running diagnostics on N6200 series andN7x50T series platforms, you must use system-level diagnostics (see “Runningsystem-level diagnostics” on page 279).

About this taskYou can stop the diagnostics test at any time without harm to the system bypressing Ctrl+C.

For additional information about the SYSDIAG tool, see the IBM System Storage Nseries Diagnostics Guide on the N series support website at www.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/.

ProcedureComplete the following steps to run diagnostics on all platforms other than N6200series or N7x50T systems.1. Enter the following command at the Loader prompt to bring up the

diagnostics menu: boot_diags. The Maintenance mode prompt (*>) appears.2. Enter the applicable command:

If you have a... Then enter...

PAM iomem




If you have a... Then enter...

Flash Cache module and you are running aversion of SYSDIAG that is 5.5 or higher.

fcache

Flash Cache module and you are running aversion of SYSDIAG that is earlier than 5.5

pam2

3. When prompted, enter the following selection to start the module selectionprocess: 90

4. When prompted, enter the slot number of each module you want to test.5. When prompted, enter the following selection to verify your configuration: 51

The output for each slot you designated should be PASSED.If the result is something other than PASSED, see the IBM System Storage Nseries Diagnostics Guide for a list of error messages and corrective actions. Thisguide is available on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed andnavigated as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

6. If you have a Flash Cache module, complete the following substeps;otherwise, go to step 9.The memory size of the caching module dictates the amount of time a fullmemory test takes. For example, running a full memory test on a Flash Cachemodule can take about one hour, so you want to minimize the test time bysetting the test address range.a. When prompted, enter the following selection: 81

b. Answer the prompts to set the address range.c. When prompted, enter the following selection to verify the address range

you designated for the Flash Cache module: 80

7. When prompted, enter the following selection to run the comprehensive teston the new caching module: 1 The output for each slot you designated shouldbe PASSED.If the result is something other than PASSED, see the IBM System Storage Nseries Diagnostics Guide for a list of error messages and corrective actions. Thisguide is available on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed andnavigated as described in “Websites” on page xxiv.

8. Exit diagnostics by entering the exit command.9. Return the system to normal operation:

If your system is... Then enter...

An HA pair running 7-Mode From the partner node console: cf giveback

A stand-alone configuration At the prompt to boot the system:boot_ontap

10. Go to “Completing the replacement process.”

Completing the replacement processOnce you have completed all of the other installation procedures, refer to this tableto determine your final steps.

If you are... Then...

Installing an additional caching module in a system withpreexisting caching modules

You have completed the installation process and aredone with this procedure.


If you are... Then...

Replacing a failed caching module Return the failed part to IBM, following the RMAinstructions shipped with the kit. Contact IBM Serviceand Support: 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378) if youneed the RMA number or additional help with thereplacement procedure.

Installing a caching module for the first time orupgrading the 16-GB PAMs to Flash Cache modules

You must have a valid WAFL external cache softwarelicense key to complete the WAFL external cacheinstallation. IBM provides your license key on theprinted IBM System Storage N series FunctionAuthorization form that you received from IBM withyour software offering order. If you do not have theFunction Authorization form, contact the IBMManufacturing Quality Hotline.

Enable the WAFL external cache software and set thesoftware configuration options by completing thefollowing substeps:

v Enable the WAFL external cache software license byentering the following command:license add licensekey

– For 7-Mode, run this command from the systemconsole prompt.

– For a 7-Mode HA pair , run this command fromeach node.

WAFL external cache functionality is enabledautomatically.

v Verify that WAFL external cache functionality isenabled by entering the following command: optionsflexscale.enable

– For 7-Mode, run this command from the systemconsole prompt.

– For a 7-Mode HA pair , run this command fromeach node.

The output should show that the functionality is on.

v Read about the WAFL external cache configurations inthe Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System AdministrationGuide (available at: www.ibm.com/storage/support/nseries/).Knowing your application and volume configurationhelps you decide what configuration options tochoose.Note: You can set the WAFL external cacheconfiguration options now or later, but it isrecommended that you set the options now to ensureoptimal performance for the system's workload.

v Follow the applicable option-enabling procedures inthe Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System AdministrationGuide.Note: The option-enabling procedures in the DataONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System Administration Guideapply to 7-Mode.Note: For a 7-Mode HA pair , you must configureoptions on each node.





Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation

The following lists present an overview of the IBM System Storage N serieshardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents.

You can access the latest versions of the documents listed in these tables on theIBM N series support website, which is accessed and navigated as described in“Websites” on page xxiv.

N7x50T series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0948v IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GA32-0949v IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GA32-0950

N7000 series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7953v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7954v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7956

N6200 series systems library (covering the N6210 and N6240)v IBM System Storage N6200 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC53-0838v IBM System Storage N6200 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GA32-0840v IBM System Storage N6200 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GA32-0841

N6000 series systems library (covering the N6040, N6060 and N6070)v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC53-1142-00v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC53-1143-00v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC53-1144-00

N5000 series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N5000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7785v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7784v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,

GC26-7838


N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems libraryv IBM System Storage N3300, N3400 and N3600 Hardware and Service Guide,

GC27-2280v IBM System Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2086v IBM System Storage N3400 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2279v IBM System Storage N3600 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2089

N3700 storage system libraryv IBM System Storage N3700 Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0515v IBM System Storage N3700 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA32-0517

N series storage expansion units libraryv IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide,

GC26-7802v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7786v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide,

GA32-0516v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2064v IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide,



GC27-2080v IBM System Storage EXN4000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2079v IBM System Storage N series Universal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide, GC27-3919v Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk shelves and FibreBridge 6500N Guide

v ATTO Installation and Operation Manual (not IBM-branded)


|

|

Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Release Notes, GA32-1032v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Archive and Compliance

Management Guide, GA32-1033v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Upgrade and

Revert/Downgrade Guide, GA32-1034v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Block Access Management

Guide for iSCSI and FC, GA32-1035v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode High Availability

Configuration Guide, GA32-1036v IBM System Storage N Series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Commands Man Page

Reference Volume 1, GA32-1037v IBM System Storage N Series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Commands Man Page

Reference Volume 2, GA32-1038v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Data Protection Online Backup

and Recovery Guide, GA32-1039v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Data Protection Tape Backup

and Recovery Guide, GA32-1040v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode MultiStore Management

Guide, GA32-1041v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Network Management Guide,

GA32-1042v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode File Access and Protocol

Management Guide, GA32-1043v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Software Setup Guide,

GA32-1044v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode Storage Management Guide,

GA32-1045v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode System Administration Guide,

GA32-1046v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and Reference Guide,

GA32-1049v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Third-party Storage,

GA32-1050v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for the

Data ONTAP 8.1 Release Family, GA32-1065

Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Release Notes, GA32-0723v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Upgrade Guide, GA32-0724v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Block Access Management

Guide for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0725v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode High Availability

Configuration Guide, GA32-0726v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0727v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: Manual Page

Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0728

Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation 287

|

|

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

||

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Core Commands QuickReference, GA32-0729

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Data Protection Online Backupand Recovery Guide, GA32-0730

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Data Protection Tape Backupand Recovery Guide, GA32-0731

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode File Access and ProtocolsManagement Guide, GA32-0732

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode MultiStore ManagementGuide, GA32-0733

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Network Management Guide,GA32-0734

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Software Setup Guide,GA32-0735

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Storage Management Guide,GA32-0736

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System Administration Guide,GA32-0737

v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for theData ONTAP 8.0 Release Family, GA32-0783

Data ONTAP 7.3 libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175

Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x ReleaseNotes covers both filers and gateways.

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3. Release Notes, GC27-2201v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active Configuration Guide,

GC27-2208v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 File Access and Protocols Management

Guide, GC27-2207v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Management Guide,

GC52-1277v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Online Backup and

Recovery Guide, GC27-2204v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Tape Backup and

Recovery Guide, GC27-2205v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 MultiStore Management Guide,

GC52-1281v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Network Management Guide,

GC52-1280v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference,

Volume 1, GC27-2202v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference,

Volume 2, GC27-2203v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Upgrade Guide, GC27-2200v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Block Access Management Guide for

iSCSI and FCP, GC52-1282v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 System Administration Guide,

GC52-1279


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Software Setup Guide, GC27-2206v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Core Commands Quick Reference,

GC52-1278v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Archive and Compliance Management

Guide, GC53-1168v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Efficiency Management Guide,

GA32-0773v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for the

Data ONTAP 7.3 Release Family, GC53-1300

Data ONTAP 7.2 libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Release Notes, GC26-7963v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide,

GC26-7964v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 File Access and Protocols Management

Guide, GC26-7965v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide,

GC26-7966v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backup and

Recovery Guide, GC26-7967v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and

Recovery Guide, GC26-7968v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide,

GC26-7969v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide,

GC26-7970v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference,

Volume 1, GC26-7971v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference,

Volume 2, GC26-7972v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7976v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guide for

iSCSI & FCP, GC26-7973v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide,

GC26-7974v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide, GC26-7975v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands Quick Reference,

GC26-7977v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for Data

ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182

Data ONTAP 7.1 libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7862v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and Management

Guide, GC26-7790v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and Protocols Management

Guide, GA32-0520v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide,

GA32-0521


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backup andRecovery Guide, GA32-0522

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup andRecovery Guide, GA32-0523

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide,GA32-0524

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide,GA32-0525

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page Reference,Volume 1, GA32-0526

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page Reference,Volume 2, GA32-0527

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7791v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guide for

iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0528v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide,

GA32-0529v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide, GA32-0530v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands Quick Reference,

GA32-0531v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide for Data

ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182

Gateway systems library (Data ONTAP 7.2 and later, including DataONTAP 8.0 7-Mode)

Release Notes

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes, GC26-7955v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175

Note: In Data ONTAP 7.3.1 and later releases, including Data ONTAP 8.07-Mode, a single Data ONTAP Release Notes will cover both filers andgateways.

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode Release Notes, GA32-0723

Other publications

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and Reference Guide,GC53-1148

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Metrocluster Guide, GC53-1149v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Native Disk Shelves,

GC27-2188 (for Data ONTAP 7.3 and later gateways only)v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMC Symmetrix

Storage, GC27-2190v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP EVA Storage,

GC27-2192v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP XP Storage,

GC27-2193v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for 3PAR InServ Storage,

GC27-2195


v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMC CLARiiONStorage, GC27-2191

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM Storage,GC27-2194

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM SAN VolumeController Storage, GC53-1151

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Hitachi Storage,GC53-1164

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Fujitsu ETERNUSStorage, GC53-1165

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for RamSan Storage,GC52-1342

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM XIV Storage, ,GA32-0794

The following gateway guides were eliminated in the Data ONTAP 7.3.2 and 7.3.3releases; their content was merged with other Data ONTAP documentation.v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC53-1150v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Upgrade Guide, GC26-1166v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and Management

Guide, GC53-1147

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems libraryv IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC26-7839v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage, GC26-7840v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage,

GC26-7841v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for HP Storage, GC26-7858v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Upgrade Guide, GC26-7859v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and Management

Guide, GC26-7886v IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7837

Other N series and N series-related documentsv IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC27-2088 (previously

called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and Troubleshooting Guide,GC26-7984)

v IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC26-7789 (supporting N3700,N3300, N3400, N3600, N5000 series, N6000 series, and N7000 series systems)

v IBM System Storage N series System Level Diagnostics Guide, GA32-0839(supporting N6200 series, N7x50T series and later systems)

v IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0543v IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Overview, GC26-7854v IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in Fibre Channel

SAN Configurations, GC26-7876v IBM System Storage series Fabric-attached MetroCluster Systems: Brocade Switch

Configuration Guide, GC27-2091-01

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243


||

v IBM System Storage N series Safety Notices, 46X6016v IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide Z125-5823v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Models 200 and

N00, GC26-7993v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Model N42,

GC53-1174


Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document inother countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on theproducts and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBMproduct, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBMproduct, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right maybe used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify theoperation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matterdescribed in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give youany license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of LicensingIBM CorporationNorth Castle DriveArmonk, NY 10504-1785U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any othercountry where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THISPUBLICATIONS “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express orimplied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not applyto you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will beincorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improvementsand/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publicationat any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided forconvenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of thosewebsites. The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBMproduct and use of those websites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way itbelieves appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2,June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the relevantsource code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are coveredby the GPL, is available from ftp://ftp.netapp.com/frm-ntap/opensource/.


CopyrightsCopyright © 2005, 2011 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or services do notimply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBMoperates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended tostate or imply that only IBM's product, program or service may be used. Anyfunctionally equivalent product, program or service that does not infringe any ofIBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product,program or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction withother products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user'sresponsibility.

TrademarksIBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com® are trademarks or registered trademarks ofInternational Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,or both. A complete and current list of other IBM trademarks is available on theweb at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetApp–the NetworkAppliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FAServer, FilerView, gFiler,MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror,SnapMover, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registeredtrademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or othercountries. gFiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and TheEvolution of Storage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the UnitedStates and/or other countries and registered trademarks in some other countries.ApplianceWatch, BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock,ComplianceJournal, ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol,FPolicy, HyperSAN, InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetAppon the web, ONTAPI, RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Serving Databy Design, SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector,SnapDrive, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, vFiler,VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of NetworkAppliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp AvailabilityAssurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are service marks of Network Appliance,Inc. in the United States.

Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or itssubsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, orboth.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation inthe United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and othercountries.

All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective holders and should be treated as such.


http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

Electronic emission noticesThe following statements apply to this product. The statements for other productsintended for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class AStatement

This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digitaldevice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operatedin a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiateradio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmfulinterference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference athis own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order tomeet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or televisioninterference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or byunauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changesor modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance StatementThis Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie CanadaCet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 duCanada.

European Union EMC Directive Conformance StatementThis product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU CouncilDirective 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member Statesrelating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for anyfailure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommendedmodification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Attention: This is an EN55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment thisproduct may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required totake adequate measures.

Responsible manufacturer:International Business Machines Corp.New Orchard RoadArmonk, New York 10504Tel: 919-499-1900

Notices 295

European community contact:IBM Deutschland GmbHTechnical Regulations, Department M456IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility DirectiveDeutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur ElektromagnetischenVerträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetischeVerträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zuinstallieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBMempfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung fürdie Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung derIBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohneEmpfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann imWohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiberverlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafüraufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetischeVerträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeitvon Geräten (EMVG)". Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG inder Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über dieelektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EGRichtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG dasEG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:International Business Machines Corp.New Orchard RoadArmonk, New York 10504Tel: 919-499-1900

Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:IBM Deutschland GmbHTechnical Regulations, Abteilung M456IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany

Generelle Informationen:


Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 KlasseA.

People's Republic of China Class A Electronic EmissionStatement

Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) ClassA Statement

Translation: This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council.If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur,in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

Japan Electronics and Information Technology IndustriesAssociation (JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase).

Japan Electronics and Information Technology IndustriesAssociation (JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products greater than 20 A per phase).

Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Class A StatementPlease note that this equipment has obtained EMC registration for commercial use.In the event that it has been mistakenly sold or purchased, please exchange it forequipment certified for home use.

jjie

ta1

jjie

ta2

Notices 297

Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Taiwan Contact InformationIBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:IBM Taiwan Corporation3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei TaiwanTel: 0800-016-888

Australia and New Zealand Class A StatementAttention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this productmight cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to takeadequate measures.

rusem

i


Index

Numerics2101 Model N00 1952101 Model N42 1967014 model T00 rack 1977014 model T42 rack 198

Aabout this document

how to send your comments xxixAC power line sizes 189active/active configurations 7adapter support 6adapter, DB-9 to RJ-45 console 131adapters

optional cardsN3600 209N5200 and N5500 215N5300 and N5600 223N6000 series system 233N6200 series system 245N7000 series 255N7x50T series system 269

Advanced Single Instance Storage 104ASCII terminal console connection 130,

131attention notice xvaudience xxiiiAutoSupport 187

Ccables

labeling 184measuring 184planning 183

caution notices xvdefinition xvexamples xv

CFO 104CIFS protocol 103clearance dimensions 152, 168

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 166N3300 storage system 133N3400 storage system 133N3600 storage system 133N3700 storage system 146N5200 storage system 148N5300 storage system 148N5500 storage system 148N5600 storage system 148N6210 storage system 157N6240 storage system 157N6270 storage system 157N7600 storage system 161N7700 storage system 161N7800 storage system 161N7900 storage system 161N7950T storage system 164

clustering 7

clustering (continued)Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect

cables 184comments

sending xxixconnections

ASCII terminal console 130, 131console 131gateway to external storage 5, 30, 37,

44, 52, 85, 89storage expansion unit to N series

filers 4storage expansion unit to other

storage expansion units 5storage expansion units to an N series

system 3conventions

command xxviiiformatting xxviiikeyboard xxviii

Ddanger notices xiii

definition xiiiexample xiii

Data ONTAP 5, 103Data ONTAP 7.1

documentation 289Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems

library 291Data ONTAP 7.2

documentation 289Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 gateway

systems library 290Data ONTAP 7.3

documentation 288Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode

documentation 287Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode

documentation 287Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode gateway

systems library 290Data ONTAP DSM for Windows

MPIO 119DB-9 to RJ-45

console adapter 131pin connections 131

disk sanitization 104documentation

Data ONTAP 7.1 289Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway 291Data ONTAP 7.2 289Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3

gateway 290Data ONTAP 7.3 288Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode 287Data ONTAP 8.1 7-Mode 287Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode

gateway 290IBM System Storage N series 285

documentation (continued)improvement xxixN series storage expansion units 286N series-related documents 291N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage

systems 286N3700 storage system 286N5000 series systems 285N6000 series systems 285N6200 series systems 285N7x50T series systems 285

Eelectrical requirements

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 167,168



N3300 storage system 134N3400 storage system 134N3600 storage system 134N3700 storage system 147N5200 storage system 149N5300 storage system 150N5500 storage system 150N5600 storage system 151N6040 153N6040 with PAM cards 154N6060 154, 155N6060 with PAM cards 155, 156N6070 156N6070 with PAM cards 157N6210 159N6240 160N6270 161N7600 163N7700 163N7800 164N7900 164N7950T 166SAS drives 173SATA drives 174

electrical requirements with PerformanceAccelerator Module cards

N5300 storage system 150N5600 storage system 151N7600 storage system 163N7700 storage system 163N7800 storage system 164N7900 storage system 164

environmentalnotices xiii

environmental requirements 152EXN1000 storage expansion unit 166N3300 storage system 133N3400 storage system 133N3600 storage system 133N3700 storage system 146


environmental requirements (continued)N5200 storage system 148N5300 storage system 148N5500 storage system 148N5600 storage system 148N6210 storage system 157N6240 storage system 157N6270 storage system 157N7600 storage system 161N7700 storage system 161N7800 storage system 161N7900 storage system 161N7950T storage system 164

Ethernet adapter support 6EXN1000 storage expansion unit

hardware features 95hardware specifications 166support 2

EXN1000 storage expansion unitsmixing 3

EXN2000 storage expansion unithardware features 96hardware specifications 168support 2




EXN3500 electrical requirementsSAS drives 175





FFC/SAS bridge for stretch or fabric

attached MetroCluster systems 98, 100FCP protocol 104features

EXN1000hardware 96

EXN2000hardware 97

EXN3000hardware 99

EXN3500hardware 100

EXN4000hardware 101

host software 119N3300 storage system

hardware 9, 12

features (continued)N3400 storage system

hardware 13, 16N3600 storage system

hardware 16, 19N3700 storage system

hardware 20, 23N5200 filer

hardware 24, 27N5200 gateway







hardware 50, 53N6040

hardware 53, 57, 62N6060

hardware 58N6070

hardware 63, 67N6210

hardware 68N6210 and N6240

hardware 72N6240

hardware 72, 76, 80N6270

hardware 76N7700 filer


hardware 86, 90N7950T

cables 94hardware 91, 94

power cords 191software 111

filer, defined xxviFilerView 103fire suppression xxiFlexCache for NFS 104FlexClone 104FlexVol 103floor loading, T00 rack 200floor loading, T42 rack 200floor plan considerations 180floor-loading specifications 180FRU/CRU list

feature codes 191

Ggateway

connecting to external storage 5, 30,37, 44, 52, 85, 89

gateway, defined xxviigeneral considerations 178

Hhardware service and support xxvihardware specifications 152

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 166EXN2000 storage expansion unit 168EXN3000 storage expansion unit 171EXN3500 storage expansion unit 174EXN4000 storage expansion unit 168N3300 storage system 133N3600 storage system 133N3700 storage system 146N5200 storage system 148N5300 storage system 148N5500 storage system 148N5600 storage system 148N6210 storage system 157N6240 storage system 157N6270 storage system 157N7600 storage system 161N7700 storage system 161N7800 storage system 161N7900 storage system 161N7950T storage system 164

high availability configurations 7host software features 119how to send your comments xxix

IIBM safety information 291Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect

cables 184input power considerations 178inspection, safety xviiinstallation

rack xviiinteroperability 6iSCSI protocol 103

Llabels, safety xivlaser safety xviload board, N3700 21

MMetroCluster 104MultiStore 105

NN series

related documents 291N series documentation 285N series storage expansion units

library 286N series storage system software 103N00 rack specifications 195N3300 storage system

clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 134environmental requirements 133features

hardware 9


N3300 storage system (continued)hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133

N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systemslibrary 286

N3400 storage systemclearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 134environmental requirements 133features

hardware 13noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133

N3600 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 134environmental requirements 133features

hardware 16hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133

N3700 storage systemcabling to storage expansion units 21clearance dimensions 146differences between early and current

CPU module designs 21electrical requirements 147environmental requirements 146features

hardware 20hardware specifications 146load board 21noise emission notes 147physical characteristics 146

N3700 storage system library 286N42 rack specifications 196N5000 series systems library 285N5200 filer

featureshardware 24

raw storage capacity 26N5200 gateway

featureshardware 28

N5200 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 148electrical requirements 149environmental requirements 148hardware specifications 148noise emission notes 149physical characteristics 148

N5300 filerfeatures

hardware 31N5300 gateway

featureshardware 35

N5300 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 148electrical requirements 150

N5300 storage system (continued)electrical requirements with one

Performance Accelerator Modulecard 150

environmental requirements 148hardware specifications 148noise emission notes 149physical characteristics 148raw storage capacity 33

N5500 filerfeatures


featureshardware 42

N5500 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 148electrical requirements 150environmental requirements 148hardware specifications 148noise emission notes 149physical characteristics 148raw storage capacity 41

N5600 filerfeatures


featureshardware 50

N5600 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 148electrical requirements 151electrical requirements with two

Performance Accelerator Modulecards 151


N6000 series systems library 285N6040

featureshardware 53

N6040 storage systemraw storage capacity 56

N6060features

hardware 58N6060 storage system

raw storage capacity 61N6070

featureshardware 63

N6070 storage systemraw storage capacity 66

N6200 series systems library 285N6210

featureshardware 68

N6210 storage systemclearance dimensions 157environmental requirements 157hardware specifications 157physical characteristics 157

N6210 storage system (continued)raw storage capacity 70

N6240features


clearance dimensions 157environmental requirements 157hardware specifications 157physical characteristics 157raw storage capacity 75

N6270features



N7600 storage systemclearance dimensions 161electrical requirements with four

Performance Accelerator Module Ior II cards 163

environmental requirements 161hardware specifications 161noise emission notes 163physical characteristics 161

N7700 filerfeatures


adapter support 6clearance dimensions 161electrical requirements with four



N7800 storage systemclearance dimensions 161electrical requirements with five


environmental requirements 161hardware specifications 161noise emission notes 163physical characteristics 161

N7900 filerfeatures


adapter support 6clearance dimensions 161electrical requirements with five



Index 301

N7950Tfeatures

hardware 91N7950T storage system


N7x50T series systems library 285NearStore 105NFS protocol 103noise emission notes

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 167EXN2000 storage expansion unit 169EXN4000 storage expansion unit 169N3300 storage system 134N3400 storage system 134N3600 storage system 134N3700 storage system 147N5200 storage system 149N5300 storage system 149N5500 storage system 149N5600 storage system 149N7600 storage system 163N7700 storage system 163N7800 storage system 163N7900 storage system 163

notices 293attention xvcaution xvdanger xiiisafety xviiisafety and environmental xiiitypes xiiiused in this document xxv

OOpen Systems SnapVault Agents 119Operation Manager Core (OMC) 120optical port terminators xvioptional adapter cards

descriptionsN3600 209N5200 and N5500 215N5300 and N5600 223N6000 series system 233N6200 series system 245N7000 series 255N7x50T series system 269

overview, planning 1

PPCI-Express (PCIe) adapters 257PCI-X adapters

optional 255physical characteristics 152

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 166EXN2000 storage expansion unit 168EXN4000 storage expansion unit 168N3300 storage system 133N3400 storage system 133N3600 storage system 133N3700 storage system 146

physical characteristics (continued)N5200 storage system 148N5300 storage system 148N5500 storage system 148N5600 storage system 148N6210 storage system 157N6240 storage system 157N6270 storage system 157N7600 storage system 161N7700 storage system 161N7800 storage system 161N7900 storage system 161N7950T storage system 164

physical planning 1, 125planning 1, 125power cords 176, 191

feature codes 191power supplies and power

requirements 176Protection Manager 120Provisioning Manager 120

Rrack installation

safety xviirack mount requirements 102, 176rack relocation xx

safety xxrack safety xviirack specifications

for IBM products installed in anon-IBM rack 205

general 201IBM 2101 Model N00 195IBM 2101 Model N42 196IBM 7014 197

reader feedbacksending xxix

restrictions, usage xvi

Ssafety

environmental notices xiiiinspection procedure xviilabels xiiilaser xvinotices xiii, xviiirack xviirack installation xviirack relocation xx

safety labels xivsafety requirements for non-IBM

rack 205security 181Single Mailbox Recovery 120site planning 1, 125SMBR Administrative Server 120SMBR Content Analysis Wizard 121SnapDrive 121SnapLock Compliance 105SnapLock Enterprise 105SnapManager for Exchange 105, 121SnapManager for Hyper V 121SnapManager for Hyper-V 105

SnapManager for Oracle 105, 121SnapManager for Oracle for

Windows 121SnapManager for SAP 105SnapManager for SharePoint 105SnapManager for SQL 106, 121SnapManager for VI 106, 122SnapMirror 106SnapMover 106SnapRestore 106SnapShot 103SnapValidator 106SnapVault Primary 106SnapVault Secondary 106software features 111software, N series storage system 103specifications for the N series storage

system 125storage expansion unit cabling

differences between early and currentN3700 CPU module designs 22

storage expansion unitscabling requirements 4connecting to an N series system 3connecting to N series filers 4connecting to other storage expansion

units 5connecting to the N3700 22connecting to the N5200 filer 26connecting to the N5300 filer 33connecting to the N5500 filer 40connecting to the N5600 filer 47connecting to the N6040 55connecting to the N6060 60connecting to the N6070 65connecting to the N6210 70connecting to the N6240 74connecting to the N6270 78connecting to the N7700 filer 83connecting to the N7900 filer 88connecting to the N7950T 93mixing 3support 2

support for Ethernet adapters 6SyncMirror 106

TT00 and T42 rack caster location 198T00 and T42 rack service clearances 198T00 and T42 racks multiple

attachments 200T00 rack weight distribution and floor

loading 200T42 rack weight distribution and floor

loading 200tasks by document title 285terminators

optical ports xviterminology xxvithermal considerations 179third-party devices

connection differences between earlyand current N3700 CPU moduledesigns 22


Uusage restrictions xvi

Wwebsites, related xxivweight distribution, T00 rack 200weight distribution, T42 rack 200Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) 6

Index 303


��

Printed in USA

GA32-0543-25

IBM System Storage N Series Introduction and Planning Guide_ga32054325

Documents

confirmed harmonics guideline

orchard road armonk

small form factor

dry bulb temperature

wet bulb temperature

federal communications commission

flash cache modules

fourth expansion slot